JP7125136B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

Conventionally, in a pachinko game machine, on the condition that a game ball enters an openable and closable starting port, a big win determination is performed to determine whether or not a big win has occurred. When a big hit determination is made, a variable display of special symbols is performed to notify the result of the big hit determination. When the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot in the variable display of the special symbols, a jackpot game is executed with the opening of the openable and closable jackpot (see Patent Document 1).

Then, in the gaming machine according to Patent Document 1, after the jackpot game is executed, the openable and closable starting port may enter a time-saving state that is easier to open than the normal game state (non-time-saving state).

JP 2018-88993 A

However, there is still room for improvement in order to increase the enjoyment of games with respect to game machines that can be opened and closed more easily than in the normal game state (non-time-saving state).

The game machine according to the present invention is
A game control means capable of executing a variable display of identification information, and executing a jackpot game accompanied by opening a variable winning port provided in a game area when specific identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display. In a game machine that
The game control means is
In response to the end of the jackpot game, the probability that the specific identification information is stopped and displayed may be in a high probability state higher than the normal normal probability state,
In the variable display of the identification information, when non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information is stopped and displayed, a small winning game is executed with the opening of the variable winning opening, and the opening and closing provided in the game area is executed. A variable starting port may be in a specific state that is easier to open than a normal non-specific state
The non-specific identification information includes first non-specific identification information and second non-specific identification information,
When the first non-specific identification information is stopped and displayed, the specific state is entered after the small winning game is executed,
When the second non-specific identification information is stop-displayed, the specific state is brought about before the small winning game is executed .

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decline in amusement in a game.

1 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine according to a basic embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a front view of a game board unit. (A) is a front view for explaining the standby state of the board movable body, (B) is a front view for explaining the moving state of the board movable body, and (C) is a front view for explaining the rotating state of the board movable body. It is a front view of display devices. It is a rear view of the pachinko game machine according to the basic embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the game control board side. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the effect control board side. (A) is a table showing normal figure-related determination information, and (B) is a table showing special figure-related determination information. (A) is a hit determination table, (B) is a normal pattern variation pattern determination table, and (C) is an auxiliary game control table. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a jackpot symbol type determination table, and (C) is a ready-to-win determination table. It is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table. It is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. It is a 1st look-ahead determination table. It is a 2nd look-ahead determination table. (A) is a jackpot game control table, and (B) is a game state setting table. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a demonstration video, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a setting screen. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a first normal background image, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a second normal background image, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of a third normal background image. It is a figure, (D) is a figure which shows an example of the background image for probability variation, (E) is a figure which shows an example of the background image for time saving. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot opening production, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a round production, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot ending production. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a production design, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a production design display area. It is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation effect of no reach loss. It is a diagram showing an example from the start of the special figure fluctuation production until reaching reach. It is a figure showing an example of N reach. It is a figure showing an example of L reach. FIG. 24 is a continuation of FIG. 23, showing an example of L reach. It is a figure showing an example of SP reach. FIG. 26 is a continuation of FIG. 25 showing an example of SP reach. FIG. 26 is a continuation of FIG. 26, showing an example of SP reach. It is a figure showing an example of movable body production|presentation. It is a figure showing an example of operation production. It is a figure showing an example of a pending|holding production|presentation. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a pending icon change notice; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a pending icon change notice; It is a flowchart of game control main processing. It is a flowchart of game control side timer interrupt processing. 6 is a flowchart of sensor detection processing; FIG. 36 is a flowchart of sensor detection processing, and is a diagram representing a continuation of FIG. 35 ; 4 is a flowchart of normal operation processing; 4 is a flowchart of special action processing; It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing. It is a flow chart of special design variation processing. It is a flowchart of special design decision processing. It is a flow chart of production control main processing. 10 is a flowchart of 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart of 10 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing; FIG. 47 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing, and is a diagram continuing from FIG. 46 ; (A) is a special figure 1 jackpot determination table according to the first embodiment, (B) is a special figure 2 jackpot determination table according to the first embodiment, and (C) is a losing pattern according to the first embodiment It is a type determination table. (A) is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state according to the first embodiment, and (B) is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the time saving state according to the first embodiment. (A) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for non-time saving state according to the first embodiment, (B) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the first time saving state according to the first embodiment . (A) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the second time saving state according to the first embodiment, and (B) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the third time saving state according to the first embodiment be. (A) is a game state setting table for non-time-saving small winning symbol stop display according to the first embodiment, (B) is a game state setting table for time-saving small winning symbol stop display according to the first embodiment, ( C) is a game state setting table for non-time saving losing symbol stop display according to the first embodiment, and (D) is a game state setting table for time saving losing symbol stop display according to the first embodiment. It is a small hit game control table according to the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart of special action processing according to the first embodiment; It is a flowchart of special figure 1 determination processing according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 determination processing according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart of special design confirmation processing according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing a mode that the production|presentation is performed in the time reduction production|presentation mode which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing a mode that the production|presentation is performed in super chance mode which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing a mode that the production|presentation is performed in the short chance mode which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing the game flow which concerns on 1st Embodiment. (A) is a hit determination table according to the second embodiment, (B) is a normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table according to the second embodiment, (C) is an auxiliary game control table according to the second embodiment be. It is a figure showing the game flow which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. In the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used in the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning pattern according to the third embodiment, the time saving state after the stopping display of the losing pattern B, and the time saving state after the stopping display of the losing pattern C be. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing according to the third embodiment. (A) is a special figure 1 jackpot symbol type determination table according to the fourth embodiment, (B) is a jackpot game control table according to the fourth embodiment, and (C) is a game state according to the fourth embodiment A setting table. (A) is a non-time-saving small winning symbol stop display game state setting table according to the fourth embodiment, and (B) is a non-time-saving small winning symbol stop display game state setting table according to the fourth embodiment. , (C) is a game state setting table for non-time saving losing symbol stop display according to the fourth embodiment, and (D) is a game state setting table for losing symbol stop display other than non-time saving according to the fourth embodiment. It is a figure showing the game flow concerning 4th Embodiment. (A) is a low-probability non-time-saving small winning symbol stop display game state setting table according to the fifth embodiment, and (B) is a high-probability non-time-saving small winning symbol stop display game state setting table according to the fifth embodiment. (C) is a game state setting table for time-saving small winning symbol stop display according to the fifth embodiment, and (D) is a low-probability non-time-saving loss symbol stop display game state setting table according to the fifth embodiment. (E) is a game state setting table for high-probability non-time-saving losing symbol stop display according to the fifth embodiment, and (F) is a game state setting table for time-saving losing symbol stop display according to the fifth embodiment. is. (A) is a hit determination table according to the fifth embodiment, (B) is a normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table according to the fifth embodiment, and (C) is an auxiliary game control table according to the fifth embodiment. be. It is a figure showing the game flow which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is a front view of a game board unit according to a sixth embodiment. It is an auxiliary game control table according to the sixth embodiment. (A) is a special figure 1 jackpot determination table according to the sixth embodiment, (B) is a special figure 2 jackpot determination table according to the sixth embodiment, and (C) is a losing pattern according to the sixth embodiment It is a type determination table. (A) is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for non-time saving state according to the sixth embodiment, and (B) is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for time saving state according to the sixth embodiment. (A) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for non-time saving state according to the sixth embodiment, (B) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the first time saving state according to the sixth embodiment . (A) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the second time saving state according to the sixth embodiment, and (B) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the third time saving state according to the sixth embodiment be. (A) is a game state setting table for non-time saving losing symbol stop display according to the sixth embodiment, and (B) is a game state setting table for time saving losing symbol stop display according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of special action processing according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 determination processing according to the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing according to the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing according to the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing according to the sixth embodiment, which is a continuation of FIG. It is a flowchart of special design decision processing according to the sixth embodiment. It is a figure showing the game flow concerning 6th Embodiment. It is a losing symbol type determination table according to the seventh embodiment. (A) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state according to the seventh embodiment, and (B) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the jackpot time saving state according to the seventh embodiment. It is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the losing pattern E time saving state according to the seventh embodiment. (A) is a game state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol stop display according to the seventh embodiment, and (B) is a low-probability time-saving losing symbol stop display game state setting table according to the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of a game state setting process after display of a losing symbol according to a seventh embodiment; FIG. It is a figure showing the game flow concerning 7th Embodiment. It is a figure showing a mode that the time-saving remaining frequency|count addition production|production is performed. It is a small winning symbol type determination table according to the eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart of the special figure 1 determination process which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a flow chart of the special design decision processing according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of special action processing according to the eighth embodiment; FIG. It is a figure showing a mode that the production|presentation regarding a small hit game is performed.

<Basic embodiment>
First, a basic embodiment of the present invention, which is the premise of the characterizing portion of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In each figure referred to, the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and redundant descriptions of the same parts are omitted in principle. In the following, for the sake of simplification of description, by describing symbols or codes that refer to information, signals, physical quantities or members, etc., the names of the information, signals, physical quantities or members, etc. corresponding to the symbols or codes will be omitted or abbreviated. Sometimes.

1. Mechanical Configuration of Gaming Machine A pachinko gaming machine PY1, which is a basic embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be described. First, the mechanical configuration of the pachinko game machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 4. FIG. In the following description, the left, right, up and down directions of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 are the left, right, up and down directions for the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1 (as seen from the front). In addition, "forward" is defined as the direction from the pachinko gaming machine PY1 toward the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and "backward" is defined as the direction approaching the pachinko gaming machine PY1 from the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1. ,explain.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko game machine PY1 includes a game board unit YU including a game board 1, and a game machine frame 2 housing the game board unit YU. The game machine frame 2 includes a frame-shaped outer frame 21 fixed to the game parlor, an inner frame 22 attached to the outer frame 21 and to which the game board unit YU is attached, and a front frame 22 rotatably supported by the inner frame 22. a door 23;

The outer frame 21, the inner frame 22, and the front door 23 have substantially the same outer peripheral shape when viewed from the front. An inner frame 22 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 21 .

The front door 23 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 22 . The front door 23 includes a frame-like front frame 23m in which a substantially vertically long rectangular large opening is formed approximately in the center, and a transparent plate 23t fitted in the opening. When the front door 23 is closed, the game board 1 included in the game board unit YU faces the transparent plate 23t. The transparent plate 23t is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate in a substantially vertically long rectangular shape. Therefore, when the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is installed in a game parlor, a player in front of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can visually recognize the game area 6 formed in front of the game board 1 through the transparent plate 23t. can. As the transparent plate 23t, a transparent glass plate may be used instead of the transparent synthetic resin plate. It is sufficient that the game area 6 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko game machine PY1 through the transparent plate 23t.

A rotatable handle 72k for shooting game balls is provided at the lower right portion of the front surface of the front frame 23m. The amount (rotational angle) by which the handle 72k is operated is associated with the magnitude of the force (shooting strength) applied to the game ball to shoot the game ball. Therefore, the game ball is shot with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle 72k.

An upper plate 34 protruding forward greatly and a lower plate 35 arranged directly below the upper plate 34 are provided at the lower portion of the front surface of the front frame 23m. A first effect button 40k that can be pressed downward is provided in the center of the front side of the upper plate 34. - 特許庁An operating portion of the first effect button 40k protruding from the upper surface of the upper plate 34 is formed in a hemispherical shape. Further, a supply ball storage hole 34A for storing game balls supplied to the handle 72k is formed on the rear side of the upper surface of the upper plate 34. As shown in FIG. Further, the upper surface of the lower plate 35 is provided with a surplus ball storage hole 35A for storing surplus game balls that cannot be stored in the supplied ball storage hole 34A.

Further, an upper decorative body 31, a right decorative body 32, and a left decorative body 33 projecting forward are provided on the upper side, the right side, and the left side of the front transparent plate 23t of the front frame 23m. On the bottom surface of the upper decorative body 31, a pair of two speakers 52 capable of outputting sound, specifically, a speaker 52L arranged on the left side and a speaker 52R arranged on the right side, face downward and extend in a predetermined horizontal direction. They are placed side by side at a distance. In addition, a second effect button 41k that can be pressed downward is provided at the lower portion of the right decorative body 32. As shown in FIG. The operating portion of the second effect button 41k is shaped like a bar. Furthermore, frame lamps 53 capable of emitting light are provided from the right decorative body 32 to the front right portion of the upper plate 34 and from the left decorative body 33 to the front left portion of the upper plate 34 .

It should be noted that the positions and numbers of the members and devices provided in the game machine frame 2 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, the game board unit YU will be explained using FIG. 2 in addition to FIG. The game board unit YU has a game board 1 and a board performance unit EU attached to the back surface of the game board 1. - 特許庁First, the game board 1 will be explained. The game board 1 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate. A generally circular opening 1A is formed in the approximate center of the game board 1 when viewed from the front.

A substantially ring-shaped center decoration 61 is formed on the front surface of the game board 1 so as to protrude forward along the opening 1A. Further, outside the center decoration 61, an outer rail 62 formed in a substantially ring shape so as to largely surround the center decoration 61 and an outer rail 62 between the left portion of the outer rail 62 and the center decoration 61 are provided. 62 and a curved inner rail 63 substantially parallel to the center decorative body 61 are formed.

A game area 6 is formed on the front surface of the game board 1 by a center decoration 61, an outer rail 62, an inner rail 63, and the like. That is, the front surface of the game board 1 is divided into the game area 6 and other areas by the center decoration 61, the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 63. As shown in FIG. A region surrounded by the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 63 forms a launching region 7 through which the launched game ball can travel toward the playing region 6 .

The game area 6 is an area in which a game ball shot by operating the handle 72k can flow down, and is provided for playing a game in the pachinko game machine PY1. The game area 6 is provided with a large number of game nails (not shown). The game nail is suitable for the game ball entering the game area 6 and flowing down the game area 6 to the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the gate 13, the big winning opening 14, etc. It constitutes a route that guides to

A general winning device 10</b>D is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 6 . The general prize winning device 10D is formed with a general prize winning port 10 that allows game balls to enter. When game balls enter the general winning hole 10, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball entering the general winning hole 10 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

In addition, a first starting winning device 11D is provided directly below the center of the center decorative body 61 in the game area 6. As shown in FIG. The first start winning device 11D is formed so that a game ball can enter the first start opening 11. - 特許庁The first starting prize winning device 11D has a non-operating structure that does not operate. Therefore, the first starting port 11 is constant (unchangeable) without changing the ease with which a game ball can enter. When the game balls enter the first starting port 11, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball entering the first starting hole 11 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

A warp portion 61w is formed from the left side of the center decorative body 61 to the lower end thereof, through which a game ball is passed. An entrance to the warp portion 61w is formed on the left side of the center decoration 61. As shown in FIG. The game ball entering the warp portion 61w passes through the inside of the warp portion 61w and exits from the exit. A stage 61s on which a game ball can roll is provided near the exit of the warp portion 61w and on the upper surface of the lower end portion of the center decorative body 61. As shown in FIG. At the tip of the stage 61s, a downward guiding portion 61y for guiding the game ball downward is provided. A first starting port 11 is provided directly below the downward guiding portion 61y.

Immediately below the first starting port 11 in the game area 6, a second starting winning device (so-called "electric chew") 12D is provided. The electric chew 12D is formed with a second starting port 12 that can be changed between a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter and an open state in which a game ball can enter. The second starting port 12 takes a closed state and an open state by an electric-tube opening/closing member 12k provided in the electric-tube 12D. That is, the second starting port 12 is opened and closed by the operation of the electric tube opening/closing member 12k.

The electric tube opening/closing member 12k is formed of a substantially L-shaped member when viewed from the front, and normally closes the second starting port 12. As shown in FIG. The electric chew opening/closing member 12k can protrude forward from a retracted state in which the front end surface is flush with the game area 6.例文帳に追加When the electric chew opening/closing member 12k protrudes forward, the electric chew opening/closing member 12k protrudes vertically to the game area 6, and the second start opening 12 is opened so that a ball can be entered. Specifically, the vertical portion erected at the left end of the horizontal portion of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k receives the game ball and guides it to the second starting port 12 from the horizontal portion.

In this way, the game ball can enter the second starting port 12 only when the electronic chew opening/closing member 12k is in the open state. When the game balls enter the second starting port 12, a predetermined number (for example, two) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball entering the second starting port 12 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

A gate 13 is provided on the right side of the center decorative body 61 . The gate 13 is configured to allow passage of game balls. Even if the game balls pass through the gate 13, the prize balls are not paid out. In addition, the game ball that has passed through the gate 13 flows down the game area 6 as it is.

A big winning device 14D is provided on the right side of the first starting winning device 11D in the game area 6 and downstream of the gate 13 . The big winning device 14D is formed with a big winning opening 14 that can be changed between a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter and an open state in which a game ball can enter. The big prize opening 14 takes a closed state and an open state by an AT opening/closing member 14k provided in the big prize winning device 14D. That is, the big winning opening 14 is opened and closed by the operation of the AT opening/closing member 14k.

The AT opening/closing member 14k is a movable member made of a flat plate having a substantially oblong rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and normally closes the big winning opening 14. As shown in FIG. A horizontal rotating shaft is provided at the lower end of the AT opening/closing member 14k. The AT opening/closing member 14k can be rotated approximately 90 degrees around its rotation axis so that the upper end of the AT opening/closing member 14k falls forward. When the AT opening/closing member 14k rotates, the AT opening/closing member 14k protrudes perpendicularly to the game area 6, and the big winning opening 14 is opened so that a ball can be entered.

In this way, the game ball can enter the big winning hole 14 only when the AT opening/closing member 14k is in the open state. When game balls enter the big winning hole 14, a predetermined number (one in the first embodiment) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball entering the big winning hole 14 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

In addition, below the big winning device 14D in the game area 6, the upper surface thereof is formed obliquely downward to the left, and a guide path 64 for guiding the game ball to the second start port 12 is formed in the game area 6 (the front surface of the game board 1). It is provided so as to protrude forward from the A game ball rolling on the upper surface of the guide path 64 can flow down toward the second starting port 12 , but basically cannot enter the first starting port 11 .

In addition, the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 11, the second start hole 12, the big prize hole 14, and the general prize hole 10, and the passage of the game ball through the gate 13 are collectively referred to as the first start hole 11, The second starting gate 12, the big prize gate 14, the general prize gate 10, and the "winning" to the gate 13 are collectively called.

By the way, the game area 6 in which game balls can flow can be divided into a left game area 6A on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction and a right game area 6B on the right side. The operation mode of the handle 72k that shoots the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 6A is called "left hitting". On the other hand, the operation mode of the handle 72k that shoots the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 6B is called "right hitting".

In the game area 6, the flow path through which the game ball can flow down when the game ball is shot left-handed is called a first flow path R1, and the game ball can flow down when the game ball is shot right-handed. Such a flow path is referred to as a second flow path R2. The first flow path R1 and the second flow path R2 are also configured by a large number of game nails (not shown).

A first starting port 11 and two general winning ports 10 are provided on the first flow path R1. Therefore, the player can aim to win the first starting hole 11 or the general winning hole 10 by shooting the game ball so as to flow down the first flow path R1 by hitting to the left. On the other hand, a second starting port 12, a gate 13, and a big winning port 14 are provided on the second flow path R2. Therefore, the player can aim to enter the gate 13, the second starting hole 12, or the big winning hole 14 by shooting the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2 by hitting to the right.

In addition, at substantially the bottom of the game area 6, there are provided two out holes 19 for discharging game balls that have been hit into the game area 6 but have not won in any of the winning holes to the outside of the game area 6. there is Also, the number of winning balls to be awarded to each winning hole can be appropriately set.

Next, the board effect unit EU attached to the back surface of the game board 1 will be described. The board effect unit EU is a unitization of a plurality of devices that mainly perform effects. An image display device 50 and a board moving device 55 are attached to the board effect unit EU.

The image display device 50 is composed of a 20-inch 3D liquid crystal display, and has a display section 50a capable of displaying a 3D image. The image display device 50 is arranged several centimeters behind the game board 1 .

The board movable device 55 includes an operable board movable body 55k. The board movable body 55k has a laterally long plate-shaped elevating member 55k2 maintained in a horizontal state, and a substantially elliptical rotating member 55k1 provided in the center of the elevating member 55k2 in the left-right direction. The board movable body 55 k is arranged between the game board 1 and the image display device 50 . The movable board body 55k is arranged at the initial position, and in the standby state, the lower end portion of the movable board body 55k, specifically the lower end portion of the rotating member 55k1, is slightly downward from the upper end of the opening 1A of the game board 1. positioned. That is, the board movable body 55k is arranged so that only a portion of the lower end portion of the rotating member 55k1 is visible to the player in the standby state, and the majority thereof is invisible (see FIG. 3A).

Then, the board movable body 55k can be lowered as a whole from the initial position to a predetermined operating position, and can be raised from the operating position to return to the initial position (see FIG. 3(B)). The predetermined operating position is a position where the board movable body 55k is positioned substantially in the center of the opening 1A when viewed from the front. Here, the predetermined working position can be appropriately set, and whether the board movable body 55k is positioned above or below the approximate center of the opening 1A in a front view. good.

In addition, the rotating member 55k1 can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise in front view about a rotating shaft formed in the front-rear direction at its center (see FIG. 3(C)). The rotary motion of the rotating member 55k1 can be executed when the plate movable body 55k moves from the standby position to the operating position, when it is held at the operating position, and when it moves from the operating position to the standby position.

It should be noted that the positions and numbers of members and devices provided in the game board unit YU can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, the display devices 8 arranged to the right of the vertical center of the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 (parts other than the game area 6) will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, the display device 8 includes a special symbol 1 indicator 81a that variably displays the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol 1"), a second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol 2 ) is variably displayed, and a normal pattern display 82 that variably displays a normal pattern (hereinafter referred to as "normal pattern") is included. In addition, the display device 8 includes a special figure 1 reservation indicator 83a that displays the special figure 1 reservation number described later, and a special figure 2 reservation indicator 83b that displays the special figure 2 reservation number described later. .

The variable display of the special figure 1 is executed when the special figure 1 lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 11 is performed. Also, the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed when the special figure 2 lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 12 is performed. The special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery will be described later. In the following description, the special figure 1 and special figure 2 are collectively referred to as "special figure", and the special figure 1 lottery and special figure 2 lottery are collectively referred to as "special figure lottery". Also, the special figure 1 indicator 81a and the special figure 2 indicator 81b are collectively referred to as "special figure indicator 81". Furthermore, the special figure 1 reservation indicator 83a and the special figure 2 reservation indicator 83b are collectively referred to as "special figure reservation indicator 83".

The variable display of the special figure notifies the result of the special figure lottery. In the variable display of the special figure, it is stopped and displayed after the special figure is variably displayed. The stop-displayed special figure (stopped special figure) is identification information representing the result of the special figure lottery derived as the display result of the variable display. When the stop-displayed special figure is a predetermined specific special figure, a big winning game with the opening of the big winning opening 14 is performed.

The special figure 1 indicator 81a and the special figure 2 indicator 81b are each composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side. The lighting mode of the special figure 1 indicator 81a and the special figure 2 indicator 81b represents the special figure according to the result of the special figure lottery, that is, the result of the special figure lottery. For example, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot, the final result will be "□□■■□□■■" (□: lights up, ■: lights out) to the 1st, 2nd, 5th, and 6th from the left. An LED lights up. This lighting mode is a jackpot pattern and represents a jackpot. Also, when the result of the special drawing lottery is a loss, only the rightmost LED is finally lit up like "■■■■■■■□". This lighting mode is a lost pattern and represents a failure. In addition, the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the special drawing lottery is not limited, and can be set as appropriate. Therefore, for example, all the LEDs may be extinguished as a lost pattern.

In addition, in the variable display of the special figure, the variable display of the special figure is performed over a predetermined variation time before the special figure is stopped and displayed. The aspect of the variable display of the special figure is, for example, the aspect in which each LED is lit so that the light flows repeatedly from left to right. Note that the mode of the variable display is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately set such that all the LEDs blink all at once unless each LED is stopped (lighted up in a specific mode).

By the way, in the pachinko game machine PY1, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the special figure lottery and variable display of the special figure may not be performed immediately. Specifically, it is a case where the game ball enters the first start port 11 or the second start port 12 during the execution of the variable display of the special figure or during the execution of the jackpot game. In this case, the special figure lottery and the variable display of the special figure are suspended based on the winning prize. This suspended special figure lottery and variable display of the special figure are referred to as "special figure reservation".

For the special figure reservation, the special figure 1 lottery reserved based on the winning to the first start opening 11, and the "special figure 1 reservation" representing the variable display of the special figure 1, and the winning to the second start opening 12 There is a special figure 2 lottery reserved based on, and a "special figure 2 reservation" representing a variable display of the special figure 2. And, the special figure 1 reservation indicator 83a displays the number of special figure 1 reservations, that is, the number of reserved special figure 1 lottery and special figure 1 variable display. On the other hand, the special figure 2 reservation display 83b displays the number of special figure 2 reservations, that is, the number of reserved special figure 2 lotteries and the number of special figure 2 variable displays.

It is also possible to set or not set the upper limit to the number of special figure 1 reservations and the number of special figure 2 reservations. Also, when providing an upper limit to the number of special figure 1 reservation and the number of special figure 2 reservation, the number of special figure 1 reservation and the number of special figure 2 reservation may be the same or different. In addition, in the basic embodiment, it is assumed that the upper limit of the number of special figure 1 reservations and the number of special figure 2 reservations is set to "4".

Each of the special figure 1 pending indicator 83a and the special figure 2 pending indicator 83b is composed of four LEDs, and by lighting the LEDs by the number of special figure 1 pending and special figure 2 pending Display the number of FIG. 1 pending and special figure 2 pending. In the following, the number of special figure 1 reservations is called "special figure 1 reservation number (U1)", and the number of special figure 2 reservations is called "special figure 2 reservation number (U2)". In addition, "special figure 1 reservation number" and "special figure 2 reservation number" are collectively referred to as "special figure reservation number". Furthermore, "special figure 1 reservation indicator 83a" and "special figure 2 reservation indicator 83b" are collectively referred to as "special figure reservation indicator 83".

In addition, the variable display of the general pattern is executed when the general pattern lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the gate 13 is performed. Then, the variable display of the general pattern informs the result of the general pattern lottery. In the variable display of the normal map, after the normal map is displayed variably, the display is stopped. The stopped normal map (stop normal map) is identification information representing the result of the normal map lottery derived as the display result of the variable display. When the stop-displayed normal pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern, an auxiliary game with opening of the second starting port 12 is performed.

The normal figure display 82 is composed of, for example, two LEDs. The lighting mode of the general pattern indicator 82 represents the general pattern corresponding to the result of the general pattern lottery, that is, the result of the general pattern lottery. When the result of the normal drawing lottery is a hit, both LEDs are finally lit like "□□" (□: lighting, ▪: lighting off). This lighting mode is a winning pattern and represents a winning. In addition, when the result of the normal drawing lottery is a loss, only the right LED is finally lit like "■□". This lighting mode is a lost pattern and represents a failure. In addition, the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the normal drawing lottery is not limited, and can be set as appropriate. For example, a mode in which all the LEDs are extinguished may be adopted as a lost pattern.

In addition, before the normal map is stop-displayed, the normal map is displayed with fluctuation for a predetermined fluctuation time. In the basic embodiment, the variable display mode of the normal map is a mode in which both LEDs are lit alternately. In addition, the aspect of the variable display of the normal figure is not particularly limited, and if each LED is not displayed stopped (lighting display in a specific aspect), all LEDs may be set as appropriate, such as blinking all at once .

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7. FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the pachinko game machine PY1, there is a game control board 100 for performing control (game progress) related to a game in which a game profit can be obtained. Power is supplied to the performance control board 120 for controlling the performance, the image control board 140 for controlling the image, the payout control board 170 for controlling the payout of the game balls, and each board 100, 120, 140, 170. A power supply board 190 is attached.

A power switch 191 is connected to the power board 190 . ON/OFF operation of the power switch 191 switches on/off of the power supply.

As shown in FIG. 6, the game control board 100 is mounted with a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "game control microcomputer") 101 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to a program. Therefore, the game control board 100 can be positioned as a game control unit that controls the game. It should be noted that games that can obtain game profits to be controlled by the game control board 100 include special figure lottery, variable display of special figure, jackpot game, setting of game state to be described later, normal figure lottery, and variable display of general figure. , Auxiliary games, etc.

The game control microcomputer 101 includes a game ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 that stores programs, tables, etc. for controlling the progress of the game, a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 that is used as a work memory, and a game memory. A game CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 for executing a program stored in a ROM 103 is included.

The game ROM 103 stores a program for performing game control main processing, game control side timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later. In addition, the game ROM 103 includes a jackpot determination table, a jackpot pattern type determination table, a reach determination table, a special figure variation pattern determination table, a look-ahead determination table, a jackpot game control table, a game state setting table, a hit determination table, an auxiliary A game control table and the like are stored. Note that the game ROM 103 may be externally attached.

Further, the game RAM 104 is provided with a special figure reservation storage unit 105 . Here, the special figure reservation storage unit 105 will be described. As described above, when there is a prize to the first start port 11 or the second start port 12 of the game ball, a special figure reservation can occur, but if a special figure reservation is possible, that is, the number of special figure reservations When the upper limit has not been reached, based on this winning prize, judgment information consisting of various random numbers for performing a special lottery or the like is acquired. And this determination information is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 as special figure reservation. In the following, the determination information acquired by winning the first starting port 11 of the game ball is referred to as "special figure 1 related determination information", and is acquired by winning the second starting port 12 of the game ball. The determination information that is to be referred to as "special figure 2 related determination information". Also, the special figure 1 related determination information and the special figure 2 related determination information are collectively referred to as "special figure related determination information".

Then, the special figure 1 related determination information is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 as the special figure 1 reservation. On the other hand, the special figure 2 related determination information is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 as the special figure 2 reservation. The number of special figure 1 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a, that is, the upper limit value of the number of special figure 1 reservations is set to "4". Also, the number of special figure 2 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b, that is, the upper limit value of the number of special figure 2 reservations is set to "4".

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the game control board 100 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output from various sensors are input to the game control board 100 . In addition, the game control board 100 outputs signals to various actuators.

Various sensors connected to the game control board 100 include a general winning opening sensor 10a, a first starting opening sensor 11a, a second starting opening sensor 12a, a gate sensor 13a, and a big winning opening sensor 14a. .

The general winning hole sensor 10 a detects a game ball that has entered the general winning hole 10 . The first starting hole sensor 11 a detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 11 . The second starting hole sensor 12 a detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 12 . The gate sensor 13 a detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 13 . The big winning hole sensor 14 a detects a game ball that has entered the big winning hole 14 .

In addition, various actuators connected to the game control board 100 include an electric chew solenoid 12s and an AT solenoid 14s. The electric chew solenoid 12s drives the electric chew opening/closing member 12k of the electric chew 12D. The AT solenoid 14s drives the AT opening/closing member 14k of the big winning device 14D.

It should be noted that the type and number of sensors connected to the game control board 100 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game. Also, the type and number of actuators connected to the game control board 100 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Furthermore, the game control board 100 is connected with the display devices 8 (a special figure display device 81, a normal figure display device 82, and a special figure reservation display device 83). Display control of these display devices 8 is performed by a game control microcomputer 101 .

The game control board 100 transmits various commands to the payout control board 170 and receives signals from the payout control board 170 for payout monitoring. The card unit CU and the payout device 73 are connected to the payout control board 170, and the ejection device 72 is also connected. The card unit CU is installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine PY1, and is a device that enables ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card.

The payout control board 170 drives the payout motor 73m of the payout device 73 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 101 and the signal from the connected card unit CU to pay out prize balls and rental balls. The paid-out prize balls and rental balls are detected by a pay-out sensor 73a for counting them.

A shooting device 72 is a device for shooting game balls. A handle 72k is included in the shooting device 72 and constitutes an operating section or an input section that receives an operation for causing the shooting device 72 to shoot a game ball. The handle 72k is provided with a touch switch 72a capable of detecting contact with the handle 72k by a person such as a player. When the player operates the handle 72k, the touch switch 72a detects the player's contact with the handle 72k and outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 170 via the launch control circuit 175.

Further, the handle 72k is connected to a firing volume knob 72b capable of detecting the rotation angle (operation amount) of the handle 72k. The shooting device 72 drives the shooting motor 72m so that the game ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 72k detected by the shooting volume knob 72b. In addition, in the pachinko game machine PY1, one game ball is shot about every 0.6 seconds while the rotation operation to the handle 72k is maintained.

In addition, the game control board 100 transmits various commands including information on the game to the effect control board 120 according to the progress of the game. Based on various commands sent from the game control board 100 , the effect control board 120 can grasp the progress of the game (game control content) by the game control board 100 .

In addition, the connection between the game control board 100 and the effect control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection in which only transmission of signals from the game control board 100 to the effect control board 120 is possible. That is, between the game control board 100 and the effect control board 120, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) is interposed as communication direction control means (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 7, the effect control board 120 is mounted with a one-chip microcomputer for effect control (hereinafter "effect control microcomputer") 121 for controlling the effect of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to a program. The performance control board 120 can be positioned as a performance control section that controls the performance together with the image control board 140, the audio control circuit 161, and the sub-drive board 162, which will be described later. However, the effect control unit includes at least the effect control board 120, and uses the effect device (image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53, and board movable body 55k, etc.) for game effects, customer waiting effects, and operation promotion. It is sufficient if the performance and the like can be controlled.

The effects to be controlled by the effect control board 120 include game effects (special figure fluctuation effects, pending effects, jackpot game effects, etc.), customer waiting effects, and operations of the first effect button 40k and the second effect button 41k. It includes an operation prompting effect that prompts an operation during a valid period (operation valid period).

The performance control microcomputer 121 includes a performance ROM 123 that stores programs and the like for controlling performance with the progress of the game by the game control board 100, a performance RAM 124 that is used as a work memory, and a performance ROM 123. A performance CPU 122 for executing the program is included.

The effect ROM 123 stores programs for effect control main processing, reception interrupt processing, 1 ms timer interrupt processing, 10 ms timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later. Note that the performance ROM 123 may be externally attached.

The effect RAM 124 includes a starting winning command reserve storage unit 125 for storing a starting winning command to be described later, a symbol designation command storage unit 126 for storing a symbol designation command to be described later, and a special figure fluctuation start command to be described later. A variation start command storage unit 127 is provided.

An image control board 140 is connected to the performance control board 120 . The effect control microcomputer 121 of the effect control board 120 controls the display of the image display device 50 on the image control board 140 based on the command received from the game control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100. to do Incidentally, the connection between the effect control board 120 and the image control board 140 allows both transmission of signals from the effect control board 120 to the image control board 140 and transmission of signals from the image control board 140 to the effect control board 120. two-way communication connection.

The image control board 140 includes an image ROM 142 storing programs for image control, an image RAM 143 used as a work memory, and an image CPU 141 for executing the programs stored in the image ROM 142. . The image control board 140 also includes a CGROM (Character Generator Read Only Memory) 145 storing image data to be displayed on the image display device 50 and a VRAM (Video Random Access Memory) 146 and VDP (Video Display Processor) 144 . All or part of these electronic components may be configured in one chip.

The CGROM 145 stores, for example, image data (still image data and moving image data, specifically characters, items, patterns, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc.) for displaying images to be displayed on the image display device 50. (including patterns) and image data such as background images) are stored.

The VDP 144 reads the image data from the CGROM 145 and develops it in the development area in the VRAM 146 according to the display list created by the image CPU 141 based on the command from the effect control microcomputer 121 . Then, the developed image data are appropriately synthesized and an image is drawn in the frame buffer in the VRAM 146 . Then, the image drawn in the frame buffer is output to the image display device 50 as RGB signals. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the display section 50a.

Note that the display list is composed of a command group for instructing execution of drawing on a frame-by-frame basis. The display list contains information on various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position to draw the image, the order of priority of display, the display magnification, and the transmittance of the image.

In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 is based on the command received from the game control board 100, that is, in accordance with the progress of the game by the game control board 100, through the voice control circuit 161 from the speaker 52 voice, music, and Outputs sound effects, etc.

Sound data such as sound output from the speaker 52 is stored in the effect ROM 123 of the effect control board 120 . Note that the audio control circuit 161 may be configured by a substrate and a CPU may be mounted thereon. In this case, the CPU may be caused to execute voice control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and the voice data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 52 may be connected to the image control board 140 to cause the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 to perform audio control. Furthermore, in this case, the audio data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140 .

Also, the performance control board 120 is connected to various sensors serving as input units and various actuators serving as drive sources via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Signals output from various sensors are input to the effect control board 120 . In addition, the effect control board 120 outputs signals to various actuators.

Various switches connected to the effect control board 120 include a first effect button sensor 40a and a second effect button sensor 41a. The first effect button sensor 40a detects that the first effect button 40k is pressed. The second effect button sensor 41a detects that the second effect button 41k is pressed. The 1st production|presentation button sensor 40a and the 2nd production|presentation button sensor 41a will output the signal according to the content of the detection to the production|presentation control board 120, if it detects that each was operated.

The type and number of switches connected to the effect control board 120 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game. Also, the type and number of actuators connected to the effect control board 120 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Various actuators connected to the effect control board 120 include a rotating member motor 55m1 and a lifting member motor 55m2. The rotating member motor 55m1 can drive the rotating member 55k1 to rotate the rotating member 55k1. The lifting member motor 55m2 can lift or lower the lifting member 55k2. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of the rotating member 55k1 and the lifting member 55k2, and controls the operation of the rotating member 55k1 and the lifting member 55k2 via the sub-drive board 162. .

In addition, hereinafter, the operation of the "rotating member 55k1 and the lifting member 55k2" may be collectively referred to as the "operation of the movable board 55k". Further, rotating the rotating member 55k1 and lowering or raising the lifting member 55k2 are also referred to as "rotating, lowering, or raising the board movable body 55k."

In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs lighting control of the frame lamp 53 and the like via the sub-drive board 162 based on commands received from the game control board 100 and the like. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 121 creates light emission pattern data (data for deciding on/off and emission color, also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the frame lamp 53, and controls the frame lamp 53 according to the light emission pattern data. Control light emission. In addition, the data stored in ROM123 for production|presentation of the production|presentation control board 120 is used for preparation of light emission pattern data.

It should be noted that the CPU may be mounted on the sub-drive board 162 formed of a board. In this case, the CPU may be caused to control the lighting of the frame lamp 53 and the like, and control the operation of the board movable body 55k. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the substrate, and data relating to light emission patterns and operation patterns may be stored in the ROM.

3. Principal Games Performed by Gaming Machine Next, the principal games performed by the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 15. FIG.

3-1. Games Related to Universal Figures First, games related to universal charts will be described. The pachinko game machine PY1 can execute a normal pattern lottery when the launched game ball passes through the gate 13. - 特許庁When the general pattern lottery is performed, the general pattern display device 82 performs variable display of the general pattern (stop display after performing variable display). Here, the normal symbols to be stopped and displayed include winning symbols and losing symbols. In addition, the losing pattern of the normal map is also called "losing universal map" in order to distinguish it from the losing pattern of the special pattern, which will be described later.

When the winning symbols are stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is executed, and the game related to the passage of the gate 13 ends. On the other hand, when the losing normal figure is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is not performed, and the game related to passing through the gate 13 ends. Also, in the following, when the variable display of the normal pattern or the auxiliary game is not performed, the game ball passing through the gate 13 is referred to as "establishment of the normal pattern fluctuation start condition".

The pachinko game machine PY1 performs a series of games such as the variable display of the normal pattern and the auxiliary game based on the establishment of the normal pattern fluctuation start condition and the acquisition of the normal pattern related determination information to perform the normal pattern lottery. can be done. As shown in FIG. 8A, normal pattern random numbers are included in the general pattern related determination information to be acquired. The normal symbol random number is a random number (determination information) for performing a hit determination. Each random number is appropriately bounded.

3-1-1. Hit Judgment Hit judgment is a judgment for determining whether or not there is a hit (whether or not an auxiliary game is executed) using a hit judgment table as shown in FIG. 9(A), for example. The hit determination table can be associated with a game state, which will be described later. When associated with the game state, the hit determination table includes a hit determination table used in the non-time-saving state (non-time-saving hit determination table) and a hit determination table used in the time-saving state (time-saving hit determination table).

In each hit determination table, the determination value of the normal symbol random number (normal symbol random number determination value) is appropriately distributed to hit and lose, which are the results of the hit determination. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY1 collates the acquired normal symbol random numbers with the hit determination table, and performs hit determination as to whether it is a hit or a miss. If the result of the hit determination is hit, the hit pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the normal pattern. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is a loss, the lost normal figure is stopped and displayed in variable display of the normal figure. It should be noted that the winning probability can be changed as appropriate.

3-1-2. Normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination/normal pattern variable display Normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination is a determination for determining a normal pattern fluctuation pattern using a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table such as shown in FIG. 9(B), for example. The normal pattern fluctuation pattern is identification information related to predetermined matters related to the variable display of the normal pattern, such as the normal pattern fluctuation time.

The normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). When associated with the game state (non-time saving state / time saving state), the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table (non-time saving normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table) used in the non-time saving state and the time saving There is a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (shorter normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table) used when in the state.

In each normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, one normal pattern fluctuation pattern, which is the result of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination, is stored for each normal pattern to be stopped. That is, the pachinko game machine PY1 can vary the normal figure fluctuation time between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. For example, in a non-time-saving state, for the variable display of the normal figure when stopping the normal figure (losing normal figure), the normal figure fluctuation time is 30 seconds. For the variable display of the normal pattern in the case of stop display, a normal pattern fluctuation pattern with a normal pattern fluctuation time of 30 seconds is determined. In addition, in the time-saving state, the variable display of the normal pattern when the losing normal pattern is stopped is determined to be a normal pattern with a normal pattern fluctuation time of 5 seconds, and the normal pattern when the winning pattern is stopped and displayed. For the variable display of , it is determined to be a normal pattern fluctuation pattern with a normal pattern fluctuation time of 5 seconds. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change these normal pattern fluctuation times.

Then, the variable display of the normal pattern fluctuation time associated with the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determined by the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination is performed by the normal pattern display device 82 . In this way, by performing the hit determination and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination, the normal pattern display device 82 performs variable display of the normal pattern.

3-1-3. Auxiliary game Auxiliary game is a variable display of the general pattern, and as a display result (the result of the general pattern lottery), it is executed when the winning design is stopped and displayed (derived). In the auxiliary game, the electric chew 12D is opened

Elements constituting the auxiliary game (auxiliary game components) include various elements such as the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened and the opening time for each opening. The pachinko game machine PY1 controls an auxiliary game using an auxiliary game control table. Auxiliary game components are stored in the auxiliary game control table. For example, as shown in FIG. 9(C), it is possible to associate the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state) with the auxiliary game control table. That is, it is possible to associate the auxiliary game component with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). It should be noted that the specific contents of each element such as the number of times of opening and the opening time can be changed as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine PY1 can vary the opening time of the electric chew 12D between the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state and the auxiliary game in the time saving state. For example, in the auxiliary game in the non-time-saving state, the electric chew 12D is opened only for the first opening time during which it is difficult to win the game balls such as 0.2 seconds. On the other hand, in the auxiliary game in the time saving state, for example, it is longer than the first opening time, such as opening twice for 2.5 seconds with an interval (closed) of 1.0 seconds, and the game ball wins the electric chew 12D. The electric tube 12D is opened only for a second opening time that is easy to set.

In addition, below, the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state is also referred to as "short opening auxiliary game". On the other hand, the auxiliary game in the time saving state is also called "long opening auxiliary game". In addition, the opening time in each auxiliary game is the total time in that auxiliary game. It may be configured as follows.

3-2. Games Related to Special Figures Next, games related to special figures will be described. The pachinko game machine PY1 can execute the special figure 1 lottery when the launched game ball wins the first start hole 11.例文帳に追加When the special figure 1 lottery is performed, the special figure 1 variable display (stopped display after performing the variable display) is performed on the special figure 1 display device 81a to notify the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Here, the stop-displayed special figure 1 includes a big winning pattern and a losing pattern. That is, the results of the special figure 1 lottery include a big hit and a loss.

When the jackpot symbols are stop-displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning is finished. Further, when the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, the game based on the winning is terminated without the big winning game being played.

Similarly, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can execute the special figure 2 lottery when the launched game ball wins the second start hole 12.例文帳に追加When the special figure 2 lottery is performed, the special figure 2 variable display (stop display after performing the variable display) is performed in the special figure 2 display device 81b to notify the result of the special figure 2 lottery. Here, the stop-displayed special figure 2 includes a big hit pattern and a losing pattern. That is, the results of the special figure 2 lottery include a big hit and a loss.

When the jackpot symbols are stop-displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning is finished. Furthermore, when the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, the big winning game is not performed, and the game based on the winning is finished.

Further, hereinafter, the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 11 is referred to as "establishment of the first starting condition", and the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 12 is referred to as "establishment of the second starting condition". It says. Also, "satisfaction of the first starting condition" and "satisfaction of the second starting condition" are collectively referred to as "satisfaction of the starting condition". In addition, the special design losing pattern is also called "loss special pattern" in order to distinguish it from the above-mentioned normal pattern losing pattern.

The pachinko game machine PY1 performs a series of games such as variable display of special symbols and jackpot games based on obtaining special symbol related determination information and performing a special symbol lottery when a starting condition is satisfied. And, in order to perform the variable display of the special figure, various determinations are made for the special figure related determination information. As shown in FIG. 8B, the special figure related determination information to be acquired includes a special symbol random number, a jackpot symbol type random number, a reach random number and a special figure variation pattern random number.

The special symbol random number is a random number (determination information) for judging the jackpot. The jackpot symbol type random number is a random number (determination information) for judging the jackpot symbol type. The reach random number is a random number (determination information) for performing reach determination. The special figure variation pattern random number is a random number (determination information) for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. Each random number is appropriately bounded. Next, each determination performed using the special figure-related determination information will be described.

3-2-1. Jackpot Judgment Jackpot judgment uses a jackpot judgment table to determine whether it is a jackpot (whether or not a jackpot game is executed), in other words, whether it is a jackpot or a loss. For example, as shown in FIG. 10A, the jackpot determination table can be provided in association with the later-described game state. Specifically, the jackpot determination table includes a jackpot determination table used in a normal probability state described later (hereinafter referred to as a "normal probability jackpot determination table") and a jackpot determination table used in a high probability state described later (hereinafter , "High Probability Jackpot Judgment Table").

In each jackpot determination table associated with the game state, the jackpot, which is the result of the jackpot determination, and the loss, the determination value of the special symbol random number (special symbol random number determination value) is distributed. The pachinko game machine PY1 collates the acquired special symbol random number with a jackpot determination table associated with the game state to determine whether it is a jackpot or a loss. As shown in FIG. 10(A), the high-probability jackpot determination table has more special symbol random number determination values that are determined to be a jackpot than the normal-probability jackpot determination table.

In addition, it is possible to appropriately change how to distribute the special symbol random number determination value for the determination result of the jackpot probability and various jackpot determinations.

3-2-2. Jackpot pattern type determination Jackpot pattern type determination determines the jackpot pattern type (jackpot pattern type) using a jackpot pattern type determination table as shown in FIG. It is to be. It is possible to associate the type of the jackpot symbol with the content of the jackpot, in other words, the components of the jackpot (contents advantageous to the player) composed of the game benefits given to the player.

In the jackpot symbol type determination table, the types of special symbols that are variably displayed (special figure 1/special figure 2), in other words, the winning caused by the jackpot symbol type determination (the jackpot symbol type determination is generated) is performed. It is associated with the type of starting port (first starting port 11/second starting port 12). That is, in the jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type determination table (first jackpot symbol type determination table) used when performing variable display of special figure 1 and the jackpot used when performing variable display of special figure 2 There is a symbol type determination table (second jackpot symbol type determination table).

A plurality of types of jackpot symbols can be set. In each jackpot symbol type determination table, a jackpot symbol type random number determination value (jackpot symbol type random number determination value) is assigned to the jackpot symbol type that is the result of the jackpot symbol type determination. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 collates the acquired jackpot design type random number with the jackpot design type determination table to determine the type of the jackpot design. In the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination value is appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols.

The type of the special figure 1 jackpot pattern and the special figure 2 jackpot pattern can be set as appropriate, but for example, like the jackpot pattern type determination table shown in FIG. As a result, three types of jackpot patterns, jackpot pattern A, jackpot pattern B, and jackpot pattern C, are provided. can be provided. Then, like the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 10B, in the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination value is appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols. ing. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol type. Also, the types of jackpot symbols can be increased or decreased as appropriate.

3-2-3. Reach determination Reach determination is, for example, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, using a reach determination table as shown in FIG. to decide.

The reach determination table can be associated with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). When associated with the gaming state, for example, the reach determination table includes a reach determination table (non-time-saving reach determination table) used in the non-time-saving state, and a reach determination table (time-saving reach) used in the time-saving state. decision table).

In each reach determination table, the reach random number determination value (reach random number determination value) is divided into "with reach (generate reach)" and "without reach (not generate reach)", which is the result of reach determination. there is Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 collates the acquired reach random number with the reach determination table to determine whether there is reach or not (whether or not to generate reach).

As shown in FIG. 10 (C), the number of reach random number determination values determined to be "with reach (generate reach)" can be different between the reach determination table for non-time saving and the reach determination table for time saving. It is possible. In the following, the result of the reach judgment performed on the premise that the result of the jackpot judgment is "losing" is called "with reach (generating reach)" is called "losing with reach", and "no reach ( It does not generate reach)” is sometimes called “no reach”.

3-2-4. Special Figure Variation Pattern Judgment In the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment, regardless of whether the result of the jackpot judgment is a big hit or a loss, for example, a special symbol fluctuation pattern judgment table (special figure fluctuation pattern Judgment table) is used to determine the variation pattern (special figure variation pattern) of the variable display of the special figure.

The special figure fluctuation pattern is identification information for identifying predetermined matters related to the special figure fluctuation time, the so-called "scale", and the production flow (production content) of the special figure fluctuation production described later. It should be noted that the special figure fluctuation pattern, in addition to the special figure fluctuation time and the production flow of the special figure fluctuation production (production contents), it is also possible to include identification information regarding the result of the big hit determination and the result of the reach determination. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change the type and number of special figure variation patterns.

The special figure variation pattern determination table is the type of special symbol that performs variable display to be determined (special figure 1 / special figure 2), in other words, the starting opening where the winning caused by the special figure variation pattern determination was performed It is possible to associate with the type (first starting port 11/second starting port 12). That is, in the special figure variation pattern determination table, the special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 1 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 11) used when performing variable display of special figure 1, and the variable display of special figure 2 There is a special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 12) used when performing.

And each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). Specifically, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table is used when the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for non-time saving) and the time saving state used in the non-time saving state There is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (time saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table). On the other hand, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is also used when the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for non-time saving) used in the non-time saving state and the time saving state There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (time saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table).

In addition, each special figure variation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state) can be further associated with the jackpot determination result and the reach determination result. That is, the non-time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table each have a big hit, a loss with reach, and a loss without reach. Similarly, the non-time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table each have a big hit, a loss with reach, and a loss without reach.

Furthermore, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for each reach no loss associated with the gaming state can also be associated with the special figure 1 pending number. For example, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for reach no loss used when the special figure 1 reservation number (U1) is 0 to 2, and the special figure 1 reservation number (U1) is used when it is 3 to 4 There is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for reachless loss. Similarly, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for each reach no loss associated with the gaming state can also be associated with the number of special figure 2 reservations. Specifically, when the special figure 2 reservation number (U2) is 0 to 2 and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for reachless loss used when the special figure 2 reservation number (U2) is 3 to 4 There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for reachless loss used for .

And, the variation display of the special figure of the special figure variation time corresponding to the special figure variation pattern determined by each special figure variation pattern determination is performed by the special figure display device 81 . After the variable display of the special figure, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the result of the variable special figure display (the result of the special symbol lottery), the variable display of the next special figure is not performed immediately, and the next special figure is continuously displayed. , a jackpot game is executed.

Also, each special figure variation pattern can be associated with the effect flow of the special figure variation performance as shown in the third column from the right of the table of FIGS. 11 and 12. Here, a typical production that constitutes the production flow of the special figure fluctuation production associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern will be described.

There are normal fluctuation, reach, normal reach (N reach), long reach (L reach), special reach (SP reach), and battle production as productions constituting the production flow of the special figure fluctuation production.

The normal fluctuation indicates that the stop-displayed performance symbols have started to fluctuate, and each one of the performance symbols is displayed variably at such a high speed that it is difficult to recognize, and the variable display of the special symbols has started. It is a performance to do. Then, the special figure fluctuation production related to the loss fluctuation without reach (the part from the start of the fluctuation of the production pattern to the stop of the fluctuation), and the part until the reach is established (confirmed) in the special figure fluctuation production where the reach occurs is normal fluctuation It may consist of

N reach, immediately after the reach is established (confirmed) through normal fluctuation, for example, the production pattern that constitutes the reach is temporarily stopped at that position for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). The production pattern slows down, and it is a production that fluctuates at a lower speed than normal fluctuation. The expectation of a big hit suggested by N reach is higher than normal variation and lower than L reach and SP reach, which will be described later. When the special figure fluctuation performance ends with N reach, the remaining one performance pattern that fluctuates at the low speed is stopped. In the case of a loss, the remaining one production pattern is stopped with a production pattern different from the production pattern constituting the ready-to-win. When the special figure fluctuation performance is not completed with N reach, the remaining one performance pattern fluctuates again at high speed, and develops (switches) from N reach to L reach and SP reach while the reach is maintained.

The L reach can be executed both when a big win is made and when a loss is made, and is an effect suggesting whether or not a big win game state will be entered, suggesting that there is a possibility of a big win game state. Furthermore, the L reach is an effect that can be executed after the N reach, for example, and is performed for a longer time than the N reach, suggesting that the expectation of the big win is higher than the N reach. Even in the L reach, the established reach is maintained, but the production pattern that constitutes the reach is reduced, and a predetermined position that does not hinder the background image more than in the case of the N reach (for example, the left production pattern EZ1 described later). At the upper left of the display section 50a, in a state where the right effect symbol EZ3 is moved to the upper right of the display section 50a, the background image is switched to the L-reach dedicated background image (the L-reach dedicated video is played). Note that in the L-reach mode, a 2DCG animation image is mainly displayed on the display unit 50a. As for the content of the L reach, a video of a scene different from the game related to the SP reach, which will be described later, is displayed, such as special training for the main character to acquire a special move.

The SP reach can be executed both at the time of a big hit and at the time of a loss, and is an effect suggesting whether or not a big win game state will occur, suggesting that there is a possibility of a big win game state. Furthermore, the SP reach is an effect that can be executed after the N reach, for example, and is performed for a longer period of time than the L reach, suggesting that the expectation of the big win is higher than the L reach. Even in the SP reach, the established reach is maintained, but the production pattern that constitutes the reach is reduced, and a predetermined position that does not hinder the background image more than in the case of the N reach (for example, the left production pattern EZ1 described later). At the upper left of the display section 50a, in a state where the right effect symbol EZ3 is moved to the upper right of the display section 50a, the background image is switched to the SP reach-only background image (the SP reach-only video is played). In SP reach, a 3DCG image is mainly displayed on the display section 50a. As the effect content of the SP reach, an image of a scene in which the team to which the main character belongs and the team to which the main character's rival belongs is displayed.

A battle production|presentation is production|presentation which can be performed, for example after a reach in a time-saving state, and is production|presentation which suggests that a big-hit expectation degree is higher than normal fluctuation|variation. Even in the battle production, the established reach is maintained, but the production patterns that make up the reach are reduced and predetermined positions (upper right of)), it switches to a background image dedicated to battle production (a video dedicated to battle production flows). Also, in the battle effect, a 3DCG image is mainly displayed on the display section 50a.

In addition, in the N reach, L reach, SP reach, and the "state where the reach is maintained" in the battle production, the production patterns constituting the reach in the N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle production are displayed on the display unit 50a. In addition to the state in which it is visible in the display unit 50a, for example, it includes a state in which the effect pattern constituting the reach is difficult or invisible for a predetermined period of time in relation to the dedicated background image. Also, the contents of normal variation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle effects can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the production that constitutes the special figure fluctuation production is not limited to these, and can be added or reduced as appropriate.

Further, as shown in the second column from the right in the table of FIGS. 11 to 12, the special figure variation pattern can be named by associating the big hit determination result and the effect contents of the special figure variation effect. . And the special-figure variation pattern related to the big hit may be collectively referred to as "big-hit variation", and the special-figure variation pattern related to the loss may be collectively referred to as "loss variation".

In addition, regardless of the jackpot determination result, the special figure variation pattern in which SP reach is performed is "SP reach variation", the special figure variation pattern in which L reach is performed is "L reach variation", and the special figure variation in N reach The special figure variation pattern that the production ends may be collectively referred to as "N reach variation". In addition, the loss variation with reach is sometimes referred to as “loss variation with reach”, and the loss variation without reach is collectively referred to as “normal loss variation”.

3-2-5. Look-ahead determination Pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform look-ahead determination using a look-ahead determination table such as that shown in FIGS. be. The look-ahead determination table includes the type of starting opening related to the starting winning (first starting opening 11 / second starting opening 12), in other words, the type of special figure variably displayed according to the starting winning (special figure 1 / special figure 2). That is, in the look-ahead determination table, the first look-ahead determination table (FIG. 13) in the case where the variable display of the special figure 1 is performed by winning the first start opening 11, and the second start opening 12 is won and the special figure There is a second look-ahead determination table (FIG. 14) for the case where 2 variable display is performed. The prefetching determination based on the first prefetching determination table is also referred to as "first prefetching determination", and the prefetching determination based on the second prefetching determination table is also referred to as "second prefetching determination".

The look-ahead determination table can also be associated with later-described game states (normal game state/high-probability high-base game state/low-probability high-base game state). That is, the lookahead determination table includes a lookahead determination table (normal game state lookahead determination table) used in the normal game state and a lookahead determination table used in the high probability high base game state (high probability high base game state look-ahead determination table) and a look-ahead determination table used in the low-probability high-base game state (low-probability high-base game state look-ahead determination table).

That is, the look-ahead determination table includes the first look-ahead determination table used in the normal game state, the first look-ahead determination table used in the high-probability high-base game state, and the first look-ahead determination table used in the low-probability high-base game state. The first look-ahead determination table used, the second look-ahead determination table used in the normal game state, the second look-ahead determination table used in the high-probability high-base game state, and the low-probability high-base game state and a second look-ahead determination table used for

In addition, by the prefetching determination using the prefetching determination table shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the special figure variation pattern related to the variable display of the special figure performed by the winning to the starting ports 11 and 12 is specified. That is, the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the variable display of the special figure is specified as the look-ahead determination result before the variable display of the special figure based on the winning prize is performed. In the process of specifying the special figure variation pattern, the propriety of the jackpot is also specified as a look-ahead determination result.

And, the look-ahead judgment result containing the information about the special figure fluctuation pattern etc. is associated with the start winning command. As will be described later, the start winning command is transmitted to the effect control board 120 as a result of the prefetch determination along with its generation. It should be noted that it is possible to appropriately change what kind of information is specified as the prefetch determination result. For example, information on the type of jackpot symbol can also be included in the look-ahead determination result.

As described above, the special figure is variably displayed on the special figure display device 81 by performing the jackpot determination, the jackpot symbol type determination, the reach determination, and the special figure variation pattern determination. Then, in the variable display of the special symbols, when the big winning symbols are stopped and displayed as the display result (the result of the special symbol lottery), the variable display of the next special symbols is not carried out, and the big winning game is executed continuously. Next, the jackpot game will be described.

3-3. Jackpot game The jackpot game includes multiple round games with opening and closing of the big winning port 14, the opening (also referred to as OP) from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the first round game, and the final round game. It includes an ending (also referred to as ED) from the end of the round game to the end of the jackpot game. Each round begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round and ends with the beginning of the next round or the beginning of the ending.

In addition, it is possible not to provide OP and ED. Also, hereinafter, the predetermined number of times (predetermined order) round game is simply referred to as "round". For example, the first round game is also called "1 round (1R)", and the tenth round game is called "10 rounds (10R)".

Then, the pachinko game machine PY1 controls a jackpot game using a jackpot game control table. The jackpot game control table can be set for each type of jackpot symbol. That is, it is possible to associate the jackpot game with the jackpot symbol type. One type or a plurality of types of jackpot games can be set.

The jackpot game control table stores elements (jackpot game components) that constitute the jackpot game. The jackpot game components include the number of round games, the number of openings of the big winning opening 14 in each round game, the type and opening time (opening pattern) of the big winning opening to be opened, and the time to close until the next opening. (closing time), opening time (opening time), and ending time (ending time).

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can control a jackpot game using a jackpot game control table as shown in FIG. 15(A), for example. That is, it is possible to set the types of jackpot games and jackpot game components for each jackpot game as shown in FIG. 15(A). Here, the jackpot game set in FIG. 15(A) will be described.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol A (hereinafter also referred to as "first jackpot game"), 10 round games are played. Then, in each round game from 1R to 10R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the first jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big winning port 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the first jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol B (hereinafter also referred to as "second jackpot game"), five round games are played. Then, in each round game from 1R to 5R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the second jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big winning port 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the second jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol C (hereinafter also referred to as "third jackpot game"), five round games are performed. Then, in each round game from 1R to 5R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the third jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big winning port 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the third jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot pattern D (hereinafter also referred to as "fourth jackpot game"), ten round games are played. Then, in each round game from 1R to 10R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fourth jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big winning port 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the fourth jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol E (hereinafter also referred to as "fifth jackpot game"), round games are performed six times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 6R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fifth jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big winning port 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the fifth jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot pattern F (hereinafter also referred to as "sixth jackpot game"), six round games are performed. Then, in each round game from 1R to 6R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big winning port 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the sixth jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big winning port 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the sixth jackpot game.

In addition, in each round game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the big winning hole sensor 14a, even before the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 14 elapses, The winning opening 14 is closed and the round game ends. Also, the types and specific contents of the jackpot game components can be changed as appropriate.

Also, in the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 15(A), which type of jackpot game is executed is determined by the type of jackpot symbol, but the jackpot game is executed in a different method. You can do so. For example, a device that can be distributed to two winning ports is provided in the game area 6, and when one winning port is won, only a jackpot game consisting of a predetermined number of round games is executed. Either a jackpot game consisting of more round games than the number or a jackpot game consisting of round games less than a predetermined number may be executed with a predetermined probability by lottery or the like.

3-4. Game State Next, a game state that can be controlled by the pachinko game machine PY1 will be described. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 has a jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is being executed and a non-jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is not being executed. The non-jackpot game state includes a normal game state, which is a basic base game state, and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. Elements that are "advantageous to the player" related to the specific game state include the probability of a big win and the ease of opening the second starting port 12 . That is, the jackpot probability and the ease of opening the second start port 12 can be associated with the specific game state.

Advantageous to the player with regard to the probability of a big win means that the probability of a big win is higher than in the normal game state, and it becomes easier to win a big win. In addition, the easiness of opening the second starting port 12 is advantageous to the player when the easiness of opening the second starting port 12 is higher than in the normal game state, and the second starting port 12 is opened per unit time. It means it takes longer.

The specific game state includes a first specific game state in which both the jackpot probability and the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time are advantageous to the player, and a second specific game state in which only the jackpot probability is advantageous to the player. It is possible to set three types of a specific game state and a third specific game state in which only the open time per unit time of the second starting port 12 is advantageous to the player. It should be noted that it is also possible to mount some of the three types of specific game states without mounting all of these three types of specific game states on the pachinko gaming machine PY1.

Here, as a partial game state focusing on the jackpot probability, a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than the normal game state and is advantageous to the player is called a "high-probability state". On the other hand, the state in which the jackpot probability is the normal probability in the normal game state and the jackpot probability is not advantageous to the player is called "normal probability state".

In addition, as a partial game state focusing on the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time, the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is longer than the normal game state, A state in which the easiness of opening (the easiness of opening the second starting port 12) is advantageous to the player is referred to as a "time-saving state." On the other hand, the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is the opening time in the normal game state, and the state in which the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is not advantageous to the player is called "non-time-saving". state.

Here, the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state will be described in detail. As described above, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time saving state. That is, the time saving state is a state in which it is easier to win the second starting port 12 than the non-time saving state. Here, the specific method for making it easy to win the 2nd starting mouth 12 in a time saving state rather than a non-working time saving state is demonstrated.

For example, the time saving state can be made easier to win the second starting port 12 in the time saving state by making the normal figure fluctuation time easier to be shorter than in the non-time saving state. For example, as described above, regardless of the result of the hit determination, in the time saving state, the normal figure fluctuation time (5.0 seconds) shorter than the normal figure fluctuation time (30.0 seconds) determined in the non-time saving state let it be decided. As a result, the number of executions of the normal drawing lottery per unit time increases in the time saving state. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the probability of winning in the hit judgment and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game are the same, the normal drawing lottery per unit time The larger the number of executions, the longer the opening time of the electric tube 12D per unit time.

In addition, by setting the time saving state to a state in which the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be longer than in the non-time saving state, it is possible to make it easier to win the second start port 12 in the time saving state. . For example, as described above, in the non-time saving state, the electric chew 12D opens for 0.2 seconds in one auxiliary game, whereas in the time saving state, the electric chew 12D is 5.0 in total in one auxiliary game. Open for seconds. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the probability of winning in the hit judgment and the normal figure fluctuation time are the same, the number of times the auxiliary game is executed per unit time is equal, so once The longer the opening time of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game, the longer the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time.

Furthermore, by setting the time saving state to a state in which it is more likely to be determined as winning in the winning determination than in the non-time saving state, it is possible to make it easier to win the second start port 12 in the time saving state. For example, as described above, in the non-time-saving state, it is determined to be a hit with a probability of 6600/65536 in the hit determination, whereas in the time-saving state, it is determined to be a hit with a probability of 59936/65536 in the hit determination. . In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the opening time and normal figure fluctuation time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game are the same, the probability that it will be determined as a hit in the hit determination is high. , the number of hit determinations per unit time increases, so the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time increases.

In this way, the elements that make up the ease of opening the time-saving state are the probability of winning in the winning judgment (winning probability), the normal pattern fluctuation time, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game. . Then, in the time saving state, it is easier to win than in the non-time saving state, the normal pattern fluctuation time is easy to shorten, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is easy to become long. When the condition is established, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer than in the non-time saving state, and winning to the second starting port 12 can be facilitated. As a result, the so-called "base", which is the ratio of the number of balls won to the number of balls fired, is high. Therefore, in the time-saving state with a high base, it is possible to aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls possessed compared to the normal game state. That is, it can be said that the time-saving state is more advantageous for the player than the non-time-saving state.

In addition, in a time saving state, you may make it meet only a one part condition, without meeting all the three conditions for opening time per unit time of the 2nd starting port 12 to become long. Ultimately, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time saving state, and the winning to the second start port 12 should be facilitated.

Also, in the time saving state, such as making it easier to select a special figure variation pattern with a short special figure variation time compared to the non-time saving state, the number of times the special figure variable display is executed per unit time is small, or special The average of the figure fluctuation time may be made low. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the special figure suspension is digested becomes faster, and the effective winning to the starting opening (the winning that can be stored as the special figure suspension) is more likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

In the following, each specific game state is associated with the content of the advantage for the player, the first specific game state is referred to as "high probability high base game state", and the second specific game state is referred to as "high probability low Base game state” and the third specific game state are also referred to as “low probability high base game state”. Furthermore, the normal game state is also referred to as "low probability low base game state".

Therefore, the low probability low base gaming state can be said to be a gaming state controlled in the normal probability state and non-time saving state. Similarly, the low probability high base game state is normal probability state and time saving state, the high probability low base game state is high probability state and non time saving state, and the high probability high base game state is high probability state and time saving state. It can be said that there is a game state.

Thus, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can be controlled in a low-probability low-base game state, a low-probability high-base game state, a high-probability low-base game state, a high-probability high-base game state, and a jackpot game state. In the jackpot game state, the jackpot game state is also advantageous to the player because the jackpot 14 is open for a long time and a large amount of game balls can be obtained. Therefore, the jackpot game state and the specific game state can also be called "advantageous game state" which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

The high-probability high-base game state and the high-probability low-base game state are game states that are more advantageous to the player than the low-probability low-base game state in that the jackpot probability is higher than the normal probability state. be. In addition, the high-probability high-base game state and the low-probability high-base game state are more advantageous to the player than the low-probability low-base game state in that the ease of winning the second start port 12 is higher than the non-time-saving state. It is in play state. Furthermore, in the jackpot game state, the jackpot game state is a low-probability low-base game because the jackpot game state is a low-probability low-base game because the jackpot game state opens the jackpot 14 in which the number of prize balls per winning is greater than the first start port 11 and the second start port 12. It is a game state more advantageous to the player than the state.

Also, when the power of the pachinko game machine PY1 is turned on, the normal game state is set first. Also, the jackpot game state is set by performing the stop display of the jackpot symbols. On the other hand, the specific game state is set when a jackpot is won and a jackpot game is executed. Next, the setting of the specific game state will be explained.

3-5. Setting of Specific Game State The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can newly set a specific game state upon completion of the jackpot game. That is, after the jackpot game, the game can be controlled and progressed in the specific game state. The duration of this specific game state can be set appropriately. For example, the specific game state can be continued until the next big hit is won. Also, it is possible to limit the period during which the specific game state can be continued.

When the duration of the specific game state is limited, the specific game state can be terminated when the end condition for the duration is met. Then, when the specific game state ends, the normal game state can be set. Further, as for the high-probability high-base game state, when the end condition is established, the low-probability high-base game state or the high-probability low-base game state can be set. In this case, the newly set low-probability high-base game state or high-probability low-base game state may be continued until the next big win is won. Also, the same or different end conditions may be provided for the newly set low-probability high-base game state or high-probability low-base game state, and when the end condition is established, the normal game state may be set.

Also, the termination condition for the continuation period of the specific game state can be appropriately set. As the termination condition, for example, the number of executions of the special figure variable display can be set. In addition, not limited to the number of executions of the special figure variable display, the elapsed time after the jackpot game, the number of game balls shot after the jackpot game, the number of passages to the gate 13 after the jackpot game, or whether to end the specific game state An end condition can be set such as derivation of the result of termination in a lottery (so-called “drop lottery”) to determine whether or not. Furthermore, these elements may be set as the termination condition independently or may be set in combination.

These end conditions may be set identically for all specific game states that can be set after the jackpot game, or set for some of the specific game states that can be set. You can Furthermore, the end condition may be changed for each specific game state.

Furthermore, the specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence or absence of the end condition, and the content of the end condition can be associated with the jackpot symbol type related to the jackpot game. For example, when the jackpot pattern type is set as described above, as shown in FIG. The game may be controlled by the state. Here, the high-probability high-base game state can be continued until a jackpot is won without providing an end condition. Furthermore, the game may be controlled in a low-probability high base game state after the end of the big-hit game relating to the big-hit symbol C and the big-hit symbol E. Here, an end condition can be provided for this low-probability high-base game state, and the end condition can be set to a special figure variable display of 100 times. It should be noted that the relationship between this jackpot type symbol and the specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, presence/absence of an end condition, and the content of the end condition is an example, and is not limited to this.

Further, paying attention to the game profit of the jackpot, the jackpot in which the game progresses in a high probability state after the jackpot game is also called "high probability jackpot". Furthermore, a jackpot in which a game progresses in a high-probability state and a time-saving state after a jackpot game is also referred to as a "probable variable jackpot". In addition, the jackpot in which the game progresses in the normal probability state and the time saving state after the jackpot game is also called "time saving jackpot".

4. Main Effects by Game Machine Next, main effects performed by the pachinko game machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 30. FIG.

4-1. Production Mode First, the production mode will be described. The production mode is a division of production (or a higher-level attribute). The pachinko game machine PY1 can set, as production modes, a customer waiting production mode, a normal production mode, a variable probability production mode, a short working hours production mode and a jackpot production mode.

In the customer waiting production mode, a special figure variable display is performed in the "low probability low base game state", "low probability high base game state", "high probability low base game state" and "high probability high base game state". It is a production mode that can be set when there is no special figure variable display and indicates that it is in a standby state. A customer waiting performance is performed when the customer waiting performance mode is set. In the customer waiting effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 16A, a customer waiting demonstration animation G100 introducing the pachinko game machine PY1 is displayed on the display section 50a. Further, when the first effect button 40k is operated while the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is being displayed, a setting screen G101 for setting the effect of the pachinko game machine PY1 is displayed as shown in FIG. is displayed. Settings related to effects include setting the volume of sound output from the speaker 52, setting the brightness of the display section 50a, and setting the frequency of effects to be executed. It should be noted that the setting items related to effects can be set as appropriate. It is also possible to prevent the setting screen G101 from being displayed by the player's operation from the customer waiting demonstration video G100.

The normal production mode can be set in the "low probability low base game state", and is a production mode indicating that it is in the normal game state. Further, it is possible to provide a plurality of subordinate production modes belonging to the normal production mode. For example, a first normal effect mode, a second normal effect mode, a third normal effect mode, and the like can be provided as lower-level effect modes belonging to the normal effect mode.

In addition, below, the production|presentation mode of the hierarchy of the lower rank which belongs to production|presentation mode is also called "production stage." Along with that, the first normal production mode is also called "first normal production stage", the second normal production mode is also called "second normal production stage", and the third normal production mode is also called "third normal production stage". Say. It should be noted that, except when there are no special circumstances, basically after the pachinko machine PY1 is turned on, the production mode set when the special figure fluctuation display is started for the first time is the first normal production stage ( 1st normal production mode). However, the type of effect mode that is set first is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate.

When a plurality of production stages belonging to the normal production mode are provided in this manner, the production stages can be repeatedly switched in order when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. The switching condition can be set as appropriate. For example, the switching condition can be set so that the special figure variable effect is performed a predetermined number of times without winning the jackpot. Furthermore, as a switching condition, it is also possible to set that a specific effect such as a special figure variation effect based on SP reach loss variation is executed.

In addition, as will be described later, reach may occur in the special figure fluctuation production, but the special figure fluctuation production is established for the entire section of the special figure fluctuation production when the reach does not occur, and the reach when the reach occurs. It can be divided into a front part before the reach and a rear part after the reach is established when the reach occurs. The former part is composed of the above-mentioned "normal variation".

Then, in the front part of the first normal effect stage, the background image (FIG. 17A: first normal background image G111) mainly representing the scenery of the city is displayed on the display section 50a. In the front part of the second normal effect stage, the background image (FIG. 17B: second normal background image G112) mainly representing the ground of the baseball field is displayed on the display section 50a. In the front part of the third normal production stage, a background image (FIG. 17C: third normal background image G113) mainly representing the inside of the restaurant is displayed on the display section 50a. On the other hand, in the latter part of the first normal effect stage to the third normal effect stage, the first normal background image G111, the second normal background image G112, and the third normal background image G113 are not displayed, and in the normal effect mode A dedicated background image is displayed according to the type of reach.

The dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the normal production mode may be a background image common to the normal production mode regardless of the type of production stage, or may be a different background image for each production stage.

In addition, the normal production mode can be set even in the "high probability low base game state", and the normal production mode may be a production mode indicating that it is a non-time saving state. Alternatively, it may be set only in the "high-probability low base game state", a predetermined effect mode different from the normal effect mode may be provided. Furthermore, in the low-probability low-base game state and the high-probability low-base game state that occur under certain conditions, a predetermined effect mode different from the normal effect mode may be set.

The probability variation production mode can be set in the "high probability high base game state", and is a production mode indicating that it is a high probability high base game state. In the first part of the probability variation production mode, for example, as shown in FIG. . Also, in the latter part of the variable probability production mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the variable probability production mode is displayed.

The time saving production mode is a production mode that can be set in the "low probability high base game state" and indicates that it is a time saving state. In the former part of the time-saving effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. . In addition, in the latter part of the time saving production mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the time saving production mode is displayed.

In addition, the time saving production mode is set in a low probability high base game state and a high probability high base game state, and is either a low probability high base game state or a high probability high base game state, and is at least a time saving state. It can also be set to a production mode that indicates that.

In addition, for either or any one of the variable probability production mode and the short production time production mode, as in the normal production mode, a plurality of production stages for the production mode are further provided, and when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied, the production stage is switched. You can do it.

The jackpot production mode is a production mode that can be set when a jackpot game is being performed in the "jackpot game state", and is a production mode indicating that the jackpot game is being performed. In the jackpot performance mode, for example, during the opening of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18A, an opening image G1 suggesting the start of the jackpot game and a right-hand shot image G2 prompting "right-hand shot" are displayed on the display unit 50a. A jackpot opening production is displayed. In addition, during the opening, a background image (opening background image G200) corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is displayed on the display unit 50a as a jackpot opening effect in the background of the opening image G1 and the right-handed image G2. .

Further, in the jackpot effect mode, as shown in FIG. 18(B), during the round game in the jackpot game, the display unit 50a continuously displays the right shot image G2 from the opening and the round image indicating the number of rounds. A round effect is performed in which G3 and a number-of-balls image G4 suggesting the number of balls paid out are displayed. In addition, during the round game, as a round effect, the display unit 50a displays a background image (background for round An image G201) is displayed, and BGM corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is output from the speaker 52.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, during the ending of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18(C), the display unit 50a indicates the ending image G5 indicating the production mode set after the jackpot game and the total number of awarded balls. A jackpot ending production is performed in which a total winning ball number image G6 is displayed. In addition, during the ending, a background image (ending background image G202) corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is displayed in the background of the ending image G5 and the total number of winning balls image G6 on the display unit 50a as a jackpot ending effect. be done.

In the following, the jackpot opening effect, the round effect, and the jackpot ending effect are collectively referred to as "jackpot game effect" as the effect executed in the big win game. That is, a big hit game effect is performed in the big win effect mode.

4-2. Special figure fluctuation production Next, the special figure fluctuation production will be described. Pachinko gaming machine PY1, when the variable display of the special figure is started, the special figure variation pattern and the special figure lottery result related to the variable display of the special figure (jackpot determination result, jackpot pattern type determination result, reach determination result, and Based on the special figure fluctuation pattern determination result) etc., the special figure fluctuation production is executed.

In the special figure variation effect, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the display unit 50a so as to be superimposed on a predetermined background image. In the variable display of performance symbols, the game stops after the performance symbols are varied. That is, after the special figure fluctuation time and the variable display of the effect design are performed, the variation is stopped and the stop display of the effect design is performed. And, basically, the result of the special figure lottery is informed by the stop display of the production design.

It should be noted that, in the special figure variation effect performed by the display unit 50a, it is possible to use an image other than the variation display of the effect symbol. Furthermore, in addition to the image display device 50 including the display unit 50a, a special effect device using various production devices such as a speaker 52, a frame lamp 53, a board movable device 55, a first production button device 40, and a second production button device 41 It is possible to perform figure variation effects.

Next, the effect symbol displayed on the display unit 50a will be described in the special figure variation effect executed according to the special figure variable display. The production pattern is also identification information for indicating the special figure lottery result, and is provided in a plurality of types. In detail, one of the constituent elements of the performance design constitutes identification information for indicating the special figure lottery result, and a plurality of types of performance design are provided according to the difference in the identification information.

For example, as shown in FIG. 19(A), it is possible to configure nine performance symbols by configuring the performance symbols from numbers 1 to 9. Then, the production design including the number "1" is set as the production design G10a. Similarly, the performance symbols including numbers "2" to "9" are designated as performance symbols G10b to G10e. For the sake of convenience, when dealing with individual production designs without distinction, they are collectively referred to as "production designs G10".

Also, the number portions of the production symbols G10c and G10g related to "3" and "7" are red, and "1", "2", "4", "5", "6", "8", and The number portions of the effect symbols G10a, G10b, G10d, G10e, G10f, G10h, and G10i of "9" are blue. That is, a color is included in the component of the production pattern G10. It should be noted that the configuration of the production pattern G10 and what the identification information is set to may be changed as appropriate. For example, other components such as characters associated with each number may be added to the production pattern G10.

Next, the effect symbol display area for displaying the effect symbol G10 will be described. For example, as shown in FIG. 19(B), the left side, the center and the right side of the display unit 50a are divided into three substantially evenly in the horizontal direction. It can be a region 50b3. A production design G10 is displayed in each of the left production design area 50b1, the middle production design area 50b2, and the right production design area 50b3.

Mainly, in the first stage part of the special figure fluctuation production, the production design G10 displayed in the left production design area 50b1 is collectively referred to as "left production design EZ1", and the production design G10 displayed in the middle production design area 50b2. The effect symbol G10 displayed in the right effect symbol area 50b3 is collectively referred to as "the middle effect symbol EZ2" and the "right effect symbol EZ3". That is, in the left production design area 50b1, the middle production design area 50b2, and the right production design area 50b3, the production design G10 consisting of the numbers 1 to 9 is commonly displayed, but the production design in the relative display position. When distinguishing G10, it is described as a left effect symbol EZ1, a middle effect symbol EZ2, and a right effect symbol EZ3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, a small pattern area 50c for variably displaying a small pattern can be provided in one section of the left end (lower left corner) of the lower end portion of the display portion 50a. In the small design area 50c, the small design can be variably displayed according to the variable display of the special symbol. The design of the small pattern can be appropriately set, but for example, the number part of the effect pattern G10 can be reduced as it is.

In addition, in FIG. 19(B), the left effect pattern region 50b1, the middle effect pattern region 50b2, the right effect pattern region 50b3, and the small pattern region 50c are indicated by dashed lines. These are shown to represent the ranges of the middle effect symbol area 50b2, the right effect symbol area 50b3, and the small symbol area 50c, and are not actually displayed.

In addition, as described above, there are normal fluctuation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle effects as effects that constitute the effect flow of the special figure fluctuation effect. Some of these are described here.

4-2-1. Normal variation The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform normal variation first in the special figure variation effect. The normal variation functions as an effect suggesting that the variable display of the special figure has started. Next, normal variation will be specifically described. As small patterns, a left small pattern KZ1, a medium and small pattern KZ2, and a right small pattern KZ3 corresponding to the left production pattern EZ1, the middle production pattern EZ2, and the right production pattern EZ3 are variably displayed in the small pattern region 50c.

For example, as shown in FIG. 20(A), in the display section 50a, the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2 and the right effect symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed, and the left small symbol KZ1, the medium and small symbol KZ2 and the right small symbol are displayed. When the variable display of the special figure is started from the state where the pattern KZ3 is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the special figure is not performed, and the variable display of the special figure is started, FIG. As shown in , the special figure fluctuation effect is started along with the start. Specifically, the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the variable display of the left small pattern KZ1, the middle and small pattern KZ2 and the right small pattern KZ3 is started.

The display mode of the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 can be made different from the display mode of the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. For example, the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed by scrolling the respective performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 from the top to the bottom of the display section 50a, and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed by scrolling the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. It is also possible to change the position one after another at a fixed position. Incidentally, the display mode of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the display mode of the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 may be made the same.

Further, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are variably displayed at a high speed immediately after the variable display is started. While the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are variably displayed at high speed, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are basically background images such as the background images G111 to G115. is displayed with transparency for easy viewing.

Then, if the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of this special figure is a special figure variation pattern of no reach loss (for example, normal loss variation), the end of the variable display of the special figure (special figure stop display), stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed in the losing eyes peculiar to the reachless losing (so-called "breaking eyes").

Toward the stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, for example, as shown in FIG. 20(C), the left performance symbol EZ1 temporarily stops at the substantially center position in the vertical direction, and then shown in FIG. 20(D). , the right effect symbol EZ3 is temporarily stopped at approximately the vertical center position, and further, as shown in FIG. 20(E), the middle effect symbol EZ2 is temporarily stopped at the approximately vertical center position.

Finally, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which are temporarily stopped in a state of being horizontally aligned at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, are completely stopped all at once as shown in FIG. 20(F). Confirm (stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed). When the temporarily stopped production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are completely stopped with loose stitches, that is, when the stop display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the three small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 become the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3. The small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped all at once at the same loose stitch, and the stop display is also performed.

In the example of FIG. 20, when the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, the performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of left performance symbol EZ1→right performance symbol EZ3→middle performance symbol EZ2. The aspect is not limited to this, and can be set as appropriate.

4-2-2. Reach Next, establishment of reach will be described. Even if the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a special figure fluctuation pattern (for example, N loss fluctuation) with reach, basically in the same manner as the case of no reach described above, in the display unit 50a, As shown in FIG. 21 (A), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed. As shown in B), the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is also started.

Thereafter, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 21(C), the left effect symbol EZ1 associated with the number "5" is temporarily stopped at the approximately center position in the vertical direction, and then, as shown in FIG. 21(D). Thus, the right performance symbols EZ3 related to the same number "5" are horizontally aligned at substantially the center position in the vertical direction and temporarily stopped, and reach is established. Incidentally, even if the reach is established with the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3, the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are continuously displayed in a variable manner.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 21, when the ready-to-win is established, the performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of the left performance symbol EZ1→the right performance symbol EZ3, but the mode of temporary stop is not limited to this, and can be set as appropriate. can be done. Also, the number of the production pattern that constitutes the ready-to-win is not limited to "5". Further, the temporary stop position is not limited to the substantially central position in the vertical direction. Also, the direction in which the performance symbols constituting the ready-to-win are arranged is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be another direction such as an oblique direction.

In this way, the entire period of the special figure fluctuation production in the case of no reach loss and the interval from the start of the special figure fluctuation production to the establishment of the reach when reach occurs can be made normal fluctuation. However, the time until the reach is established can be appropriately set based on the special figure variation pattern. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute various announcement effects such as a so-called "pseudo-continuation", a cut-in announcement, a line announcement, etc. until the ready-to-win is established. Alternatively, it is possible to plunge into a so-called "zone" until reach is established.

4-2-3. N-reach Pachinko game machine PY1 can perform N-reach when reach is established after normal variation. The N-reach is an effect suggesting that the lottery result of the special lottery may have been a "big win", and functions as an effect for making the player expect a big win. Next, the N reach will be specifically described.

When reach is established, for example, as shown in FIG. 21(D), N reach is performed from that point. In the N reach, as shown in FIG. 22A, the state when the reach is established is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). When the N-reach is started, as shown in FIG. 22(B), the middle effect symbol EZ2 that is displayed (scrolled) at high speed in the normal mode gradually decelerates.

When the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the special figure variation pattern of the loss with reach (for example, N loss variation), from the state where the reach is established, the middle production pattern EZ2 is temporarily stopped at the vertical direction approximately center position. Then, the stop display of the production pattern indicating the loss is performed. At this time, since the reach is established, as shown in FIG. 22 (C-1), the middle production pattern consisting of numbers ("4" in FIG. 22 (C-1)) different from the numbers constituting the reach EZ2 temporarily stops. Then, with the end of the variable display of the special figure (stop display of the special figure), as shown in FIG. 22 (D), the temporary stop state becomes a complete stop state. Stop display of the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2 and the right effect symbol EZ3 is performed.

In addition, when the temporarily stopped production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are completely stopped by the losing eyes peculiar to the loss with reach, that is, when the stop display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, three small patterns KZ1 to KZ3. However, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped all at once with the same reach-related loss, and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are also stopped and displayed. Note that the content of N reach can be changed or added as appropriate.

When the special figure fluctuation production does not end with N reach, as shown in FIG. Reach may develop (switch) to L reach or SP reach.

4-2-4. L reach Pachinko game machine PY1 can perform L reach after N reach. The L reach is an effect suggesting that the possibility of the result of the special lottery being a "big win" is higher than the N reach, and functions as an effect for making the player expect a big win. It should be noted that even in the L reach, established reach is maintained, for example, as shown in FIG. Moves to a predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display portion 50a and the right effect symbol EZ3 is at the upper right of the display portion 50a) that does not overlap the small symbol area 50c in the portion 50a.

Further, at the start of the L reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 23A, a background image exclusively for the L reach (L reach background image G114) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The L-reach background image G114 is composed of a moving image in which a predetermined Three is deployed. The content of the story of the moving image related to the L-reach background image G114 can be set as appropriate, but in the basic embodiment, the main character confesses to a girl.

When the L-reach background image G114 is displayed, first, as shown in FIG. 23A, the scene starts with the main character waiting for a girl at a certain meeting place. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 23B, a girl appears at the meeting place. At this time, at substantially the center of the display portion 50a, as the middle effect pattern EZ2, the effect pattern of the number "5" forming the reach and the effect pattern of the number "4" not forming the reach appear. Then, it rotates slowly so that it comes out from the back side to the front side and then returns to the back side.

While the production pattern of number "4" and the production pattern of number "5" are continuously rotated, the three related to the background image G114 for L reach advances. Then, as shown in FIG. 23(C), the main character confesses to the girl. At this time, at the approximate center of the display part 50a, the effect pattern of the number "5" which constitutes the reach and the effect pattern of the number "4" which does not constitute the reach mutually repel the opponent. collide with. Since the production pattern of the number "5" constitutes the reach, and the production pattern of the number "4" does not constitute the reach, the production pattern of the number "4" is flipped off and the production pattern of the number "5" is replaced. If it remains, the stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 indicating a big win is established, while when the performance symbol of the number "5" is flipped away and the performance symbol of the number "4" remains, the performance of the mode indicating reach loss. The stop display of the symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is established. Therefore, the scene of FIG. 23(C) is the final phase of the L-reach, and a production suggesting a big win (jackpot suggesting production) is executed or a production suggesting a loss (loss suggesting production) is executed. It constitutes a branch point (so-called “hit-lose branch point”) where it branches.

At the win-lose branch point, if the special figure variation pattern of the special figure variable display is the jackpot variation (L jackpot variation), as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 24(B-1), the smiling girl in which the hero character who is pleased with the successful confession is displayed is displayed close-up, and then shown in FIG. 24(B-1). As shown, the main character who is pleased with the successful confession is displayed, and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 52 . At this time, together with the left effect pattern EZ1 and the right effect pattern EZ3 of the number "5" which constitute the reach, the medium effect pattern EZ2 of the number "5" which constitutes the reach is temporarily stopped at the center of the display part 50a. displayed in the form. That is, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit.

The display of the main character who is pleased with the successful confession and the output of a predetermined sound effect constitutes a jackpot suggestive effect. After the big hit suggesting effect, as shown in FIG. 24 (C-1), the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed in a manner indicating the big win.

On the other hand, after the winning branch point, if the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a loss variation with reach (L loss variation), the background image G114 for L reach is displayed without a jackpot suggestion effect. As shown in 24(A-2), the display unit 50a displays a close-up of a girl with a sad expression, and then, as shown in FIG. 24(B-2), she fails to confess and is disappointed. Shows the main character. At this time, along with the left production pattern EZ1 and the right production pattern EZ3 of the number "5" which constitutes the reach, the middle production pattern EZ2 of the number "5" which does not constitute the reach is temporarily stopped in the center of the display part 50a. is displayed. That is, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating reach-losing.

The display of the main character, who is disappointed because he failed to confess, constitutes a production suggesting failure. After the loss suggesting effect, as shown in FIG. 24(C-2), stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed with the losing eyes for ready-to-win.

4-2-5. SP reach In addition, the pachinko game machine PY1 can perform SP reach after N reach. The SP reach is an effect suggesting that the possibility of the result of the special lottery being a "big win" is higher than the L reach, and functions as an effect for making the player expect a big win. It should be noted that even in SP reach, established reach is maintained, for example, as shown in FIG. Moves to a predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display portion 50a and the right effect symbol EZ3 is at the upper right of the display portion 50a) that does not overlap the small symbol area 50c in the portion 50a.

Further, at the start of SP reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 25A, a background image dedicated to SP reach (background image G115 for SP reach) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The SP reach background image G115 is composed of a moving image in which a predetermined Thule develops. The content of the story of the moving image related to the SP reach background image G115 can be set as appropriate, but in the basic embodiment, the main character and an enemy character who are rivals of the main character face each other. ing. The main character is a baseball pitcher, and the enemy character is a baseball batter.

When the SP reach background image G115 is displayed, first, as shown in FIG. 25A, an enemy character appears, and then, as shown in FIG. An image (SP reach start title image) G11 indicating that SP reach has started is displayed. The SP reach start title image G11 is composed of a title image G11a representing the title of the SP reach "In FIG. be.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25C, a scene in which the main character and the enemy character are facing each other is displayed. After that, in the SP reach background image G115, as shown in FIG. 26(A), the main character throws the ball, and as shown in FIG. As shown in C), the enemy character starts swinging the bat. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 26(D), the ball and the bat approach each other, and the confrontation between the main character and the enemy character is about to be settled. This scene constitutes a branching point (win-lose branching point) at which the main character wins and suggests a big win in the confrontation between the pitcher and the batter, or loses and suggests a loss.

After this win-lose branch point, if the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a big hit variation (SP jackpot variation), as shown in FIG. After winning the confrontation, as shown in FIG. 27(B-1), the main character who strikes out the enemy character and shouts on the mound is displayed, and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 52. be done. At this time, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit.

The display of the main character screaming after winning the confrontation and the output of a predetermined sound effect constitute the big win suggestive presentation. After the big hit suggesting effect, as shown in FIG. 27 (C-1), the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed in a manner indicating the big win.

27 ( As shown in A-2), the enemy character hits a home run and loses the confrontation, and as shown in FIG. 27 (B-2), the main character is disappointed on the mound. At this time, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating reach loss.

The display of the main character who is disappointed after being defeated in the confrontation constitutes the production suggesting failure. After the losing indication effect, as shown in FIG. 27(C-2), stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed with the losing eyes for ready-to-win.

Next, the movable body production and the operation production performed in the special figure fluctuation production will be described. The movable body production and the operation production are the above-mentioned SP reach, L reach, and N reach, and even when they are performed as part of these productions in the form of being incorporated in the jackpot game production, etc., and independent of these productions. may be performed. First, the movable body production will be described.

4-3. Movable Body Effect The pachinko game machine PY1 is capable of performing a movable body effect involving the movement of the movable body at a predetermined timing in a predetermined effect such as a special figure variation effect or a jackpot game effect. The movable body production is, for example, a production using a movable device such as the board movable device 55, and functions as a production that suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit or development to SP reach.

For example, when the movable body production functions as a production that suggests development to SP reach, as shown in FIG. As shown in (B), the board movable device 55 is activated, and the board movable body 55k is lowered to the operating position in a front view, and held at that position for a predetermined time. Furthermore, at this time, an effect image G13 associated with the operation of the board movable body 55k is also displayed on the entire display section 50a. Then, as shown in FIG. 28C, the effect image G13 is erased, the board movable body 55k rises to the standby position, and the board movable device 55 returns to the normal standby state. When the board movable device 55 returns to the normal standby state, it develops into SP reach. In addition, it is possible to appropriately change or add the operation contents of the movable device in the movable body presentation.

4-4. Operation Effect Next, the operation effect will be described. The pachinko game machine PY1 provides an operation promotion effect and an operation result effect according to the operation of the first effect button 40k, the second effect button 41k, etc. at a predetermined timing in a predetermined effect such as a special figure fluctuation effect or a big hit game effect. It is possible to perform operation effects including The operation promotion performance is a performance that prompts the player to operate the operation means, and the operation result performance is a performance that is performed in response to the operation of the operation means in the operation promotion performance. It works as a performance.

For example, as described above, when the hit-drop junction is reached in L reach or SP reach, a period during which the pressing operation of the first effect button 40k is valid (first effect button operation valid period) occurs, and this first effect button Along with the occurrence of the operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 29A, an effect (first effect button operation prompting effect) for prompting the operation of the first effect button 40k is performed.

In the first effect button operation promotion effect, a first effect button operation promotion effect image G12 is displayed on the display section 50a. The first effect button operation promotion effect image G12 includes an image (operation target image) G12a representing the first effect button 40k to be operated, and an image (pressing Operation image) G12b, and an image (first effect button operation effective period remaining time image) G12c representing the remaining time of the operation effective period (first effect button operation effective period) related to the operation of the first effect button 40k. .

The first effect button operation valid period remaining time image G12c is composed of a generally curvilinear progress bar so that the player can easily understand the remaining time of the first effect button operation valid period as time elapses. change to In addition, FIG. 29(B) shows a state in which the first effect button operation effective period has occurred and 1/3 of the first effect button operation effective time has elapsed.

Then, when the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the jackpot fluctuation (SP jackpot fluctuation), after the first production button 40k is pressed in the first production button operation effective period, or the first production button After the first effect button 40k is not operated in the operation effective period and the remaining time of the first effect button operation effective period expires, the operation result effect is performed.

As an operation result presentation, for example, as shown in FIG. rotates for a predetermined time. In this way, the operation result presentation also includes the movable body presentation. Further, at this time, an effect image G13 associated with the movement of the board movable body 55k is displayed on the entire display section 50a as an operation result presentation. Then, as shown in FIG. 29(D), the effect image G13 is erased, the rotation of the rotating member 55k1 is stopped, and the board movable body 55k rises, thereby completing the operation result rendering. When the operation result production ends, a jackpot suggestion production is performed.

On the other hand, if the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is reach loss fluctuation (SP loss fluctuation), even if the first production button 40k is pressed in the first production button operation valid period, or the first production button Even if the remaining time of the effect button operation effective period expires without the pressing operation of 40k, the operation result effect is not performed, and the failure suggesting effect is performed.

Note that the operation result presentation is not limited to the operation of the board movable device 55 and the display of the effect image G13, and can be changed or added as appropriate. Further, the operation performance is not limited to the special figure variation performance, and can be executed in the big hit performance as well.

4-5. Look-Ahead Effect Next, a look-ahead effect that can be executed before the special figure variable display that is the target of the special figure reservation will be described. The pachinko game machine PY1 is capable of performing a look-ahead performance for the special figure 1 suspension or the special figure 2 suspension in which the big hit determination is not performed based on the result of the look-ahead determination at any timing of the special figure variation performance. . The look-ahead performance is a performance suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win with respect to the special figure 1 reserve or the special figure 2 reserve, and functions as a performance for expecting a big win from before the variable display of the special figure corresponding to the reserve. As an example of the look-ahead effect, there is a pending change notice using a pending effect representing a special figure pending. Here, the suspension effect and the suspension change notice performed in the normal effect mode will be described.

As shown in FIG. 30A, the suspension effect is performed in a suspension display area 50d formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a substantially central section of the lower end of the display section 50a. The reserved display area 50d is composed of a first area 50d1, a second area 50d2, a third area 50d3, and a fourth area 50d4, which are obtained by dividing the reserved display area 50d into four substantially evenly in the horizontal direction. That is, in the reservation display area 50d, the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are arranged in order from the left end to the right end.

In the first area 50d1, the special figure 1 variable display is performed first based on the special figure 1 related random number corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation, which occurs first among the special figure 1 reservations being reserved. A pending icon representing the special figure 1 pending is displayed. Similarly, in the second area 50d2 to the fourth area 50d4, based on the special figure 1 related random number corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation, which occurs second to fourth in the reserved special figure 1 reservation A hold icon representing the special figure 1 hold in which the special figure 1 variable display is performed in the 2nd to 4th is displayed.

In the following, the special figure 1 reservation corresponding to the reservation icon displayed in the first area 50d1 is referred to as "special figure 1 reservation of reservation order 1". Similarly, the second area 50d2, the third area 50d3, and the special figure 1 hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the fourth area 50d4 "reserved order 2 special figure 1 hold", "reserved order 3 of It is called "special figure 1 reservation" and "special figure 1 reservation of reservation order 4". That is, for the existing special figure 1 reservation, it is called "reservation order 1" to "reservation order 4" in the order of occurrence.

Further, the variable display area 50e is formed to the left of the reserved display area 50d. In the variable display area 50e, the icon representing the special figure 1 variable display that is currently being executed is displayed. Therefore, the target indicated by the icon displayed in the variable display area 50e is different from the target indicated by the hold icon displayed in the hold display area 50d, and strictly speaking, the "hold effect" corresponding to the special figure 1 hold is not included, but since the display of the pending icon and the display of the relevant icon are related, hereinafter, the display of the pending icon and the display of the relevant icon will be collectively referred to as “suspended effect”. . Also, the pending icon and the icon are collectively referred to as an "icon". Furthermore, the special figure 1 fluctuation display during execution indicated by the icon is also referred to as "the fluctuation".

In FIG. 30(A), the reserved display area 50d and the variable display area 50e are clearly indicated by dashed lines, and the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are indicated by broken lines. It is shown to show the ranges of the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 and the variable display area 50e, and is not actually displayed.

Next, a specific example of the holding effect will be described. In the following description, variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 will be omitted. As a premise, it is during the special figure 1 variable display (during the special figure variation production), and the number of special figure 1 reservations (U1) is "2". Under this circumstance, as shown in FIG. 30(B), in the first area 50d1 (not shown), the special figure 1 suspension that occurred first among the currently suspended special figure 1 suspension (reservation order 1 special figure 1 suspension) is displayed, and in the second region 50d2 (not shown), the special figure 1 suspension that occurred next to the special figure 1 suspension represented by the suspension icon HA2 (reservation order 2 A pending icon HA3 representing special figure 1 pending) is displayed. In addition, the icon HA1 representing the special figure 1 variable display that is currently being executed is displayed in the variable display area 50e (not shown). Note that the display mode of the icons HA1 to HA3 displayed in FIG. 30B is the normal mode.

In this way, in the suspension effect, they are displayed side by side from the left end of the suspension display area 50d to the right in the order in which the special figure 1 suspension has occurred. That is, the variable display of the reserved special symbols, in other words, the variable display of the unexecuted special symbols based on the special symbol related determination information stored in the special symbol suspension storage unit 105 is individually displayed with a suspension icon. be.

Then, as shown in FIG. 30(C), when the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, the icon HA1 representing the special figure variation display being executed until immediately before is erased. Subsequently, when the variable display of the special symbol (special figure variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 suspension representing the suspension icon HA2, the suspension icon HA2 and the suspension icon HA3 are shifted. Specifically, the pending icon HA2 displayed in the first region 50d1 (not shown) moves to the variable display region 50e (not shown), and the pending icon HA3 displayed in the second region 50d2 (not shown) is disabled. It moves to the illustrated first area 50d1. That is, the suspended icon HA2 and the suspended icon HA3 that have been displayed are shifted one by one to the left. This is because the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the pending icon HA2 is started, and the special figure 1 pending represented by the pending icon HA3 is the first special figure 1 pending among the currently pending special figures 1 pending. This is to adapt the pending icon HA2 and the pending icon HA3 to the situation in accordance with the fact that the special figure variable display is started next.

In addition, since the pending icon HA2 displayed in the variable display area 50e represents the special figure 1 variable display being executed, it becomes the icon HA2 when displayed in the variable display area 50e. That is, as the words before "icon", the icon displayed in the reserved display area 50d is "reserved", and the icon displayed in the variable display area 50e is "relevant". In other words, when the pending icon is displayed, if the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is established for the special symbol pending indicated by the pending icon, the variable display of the special symbol related to the establishment of the starting condition is started. A corresponding pending icon is displayed as the icon.

Note that when the reserved icon changes to the relevant icon, in other words, when the icon moves from the reserved display area 50d to the variable display area 50e, the size of the icon may remain the same or may be enlarged. In FIG. 30(C), the icon is enlarged approximately twice when moving from the reserved display area 50d to the variable display area 50e.

Then, from this situation, when the game ball enters the first start port 11 and special figure 1 suspension occurs, as shown in FIG. An icon HA4 is displayed in the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown).

In this way, when the special figure 1-related random number is acquired by winning the first starting port 11, one common icon is displayed. This icon disappears when the special figure 1 variable display based on the winning prize ends, but while it is displayed, the state in which the special figure 1 variable display is placed (suspended state and running state) , it will exist under different names (pending icon and the icon in question).

By the way, as described above, the start winning command includes win/fail information and special figure variation pattern information. Then, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can display the pending icon in a normal mode or a special mode based on the win/fail information and the special figure variation pattern information. Displaying the suspension icon in a special mode is called "suspension notice".

When the display mode of the pending icon is a special mode, that is, when the pending notice is given, the player can expect to win a big win by variable display of the special pattern corresponding to the pending icon. Next, a specific example of a hold notice will be described. As a specific example of the pending notice, it is assumed that the display mode of the pending icon HA4 shown in FIG. 30(E) is the special mode.

As one type of pending notice, it becomes a special mode immediately after the pending icon is displayed. There are types. For example, as shown in FIG. 31(A), from the situation (situation of FIG. 30(D)) before the pending icon HA4 is displayed, the game ball wins the first starting port 11, and the special figure 1 pending occurs, similarly to the case of FIG. 30(E), in response to the occurrence of the special figure 1 suspension, the suspension icon HA4 of the normal mode is displayed in the above-described second region 50d2 (not shown). In the drawing, the hold icon in the normal mode appears to be completely stationary, but in reality, basically, even if it is made to be completely stationary, the display position does not move, but It may be configured so that it sways lightly at .

Then, immediately after that, as shown in FIG. 31(B), the display mode of the hold icon HA4 changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 31(B)) (hold notice is performed). In the example of FIG. 29, the hold icon HA4 is displayed in the normal mode for a moment immediately after being displayed, but it may be displayed in the special mode to eliminate the period of display in the normal mode.

As another type of pending notice, there is a pending notice type that becomes a special mode when the pending icon moves, in other words, a pending notice type in which a pending icon change notice is performed during the shift of the special figure 1 hold. For example, as shown in FIG. 32(A), from the situation (situation of FIG. 30(D)) before the pending icon HA4 is displayed, the game ball wins the first starting port 11, and the special figure 1 pending occurs, as shown in FIG. 32(B), in response to the occurrence of the special figure 1 suspension, the second region 50d2 (not shown) of the normal mode (white in FIG. 32(B)) is displayed as the suspension icon HA4. to be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 32(C), when the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, the icon HA2 representing the special figure variation display being executed until immediately before is erased. Subsequently, when the variable display of special symbols (special figure variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 suspension represented by the suspension icon HA3, it is displayed in the first area 50d1 as shown in FIG. The suspended icon HA3 thus moved moves to the variable display area 50e (not shown), and the suspended icon HA4 displayed in the second area 50d2 moves to the first area 50d1 (not shown). Here, when the hold icon HA4 moves from the second area 50d2 to the first area 50d1, the display mode changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 32(D)) (hold notice is performed). .

Moreover, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of special modes related to the pending advance notice so that the degree of expectation for a big win differs depending on the type of the special mode. For example, it is assumed that the display mode of the pending icon is associated with the color of the pending icon, and white, green, red, and gold are set as the display mode of the pending icon. Here, white is the normal aspect and green, red, and gold are special aspects. The degree of expectation for a big win indicated by the display mode of the pending icon can be set to increase in the order of white<green<red<gold.

In addition, the look-ahead effect can be performed for both or one of the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation. In addition, the look-ahead effect is not limited to the display mode of the hold icon HA. It is possible to execute using an effect device other than the image display device 50 such as the operation by the device 55 . Furthermore, as the effect mode of the look-ahead effect, in addition to the effect mode that continues without interruption until the special figure fluctuation display is started after being executed, such as a pending icon change notice by the pending icon HA, the effect pattern is stopped. It is also possible to adopt an effect mode that is executed intermittently and continuously, such as each time the display is performed or each time the variable display of the effect symbols is started.

5. Game Control by Game Control Microcomputer 101 [Game Control Main Processing]
Next, game control by the game control microcomputer 101 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 42. FIG. It should be noted that the flowchart for controlling the game described below is an example. A plurality of processes in the flowchart can be executed in parallel or changed in execution order as appropriate within a range in which the contents of the processes are not inconsistent.

In addition, counters, timers, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in game control by the game control microcomputer 101 described below are provided in the game RAM 104 . The initial value of the counter is "0", the initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", and the initial value of the status is "1".

The game control microcomputer 101 provided on the game control board 100 reads and executes a game control main processing program shown in FIG. 33 from the game ROM 103 when the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on. As shown in the figure, in the game control main process, first, power-on process (S001) is performed. In the power-on processing, access permission setting to the game RAM 104, setting of the game CPU 102, SIO (System Input/Output), PIO (Parallel Input/Output), CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit: interrupt time management) circuit) are set.

Following the power-on process, interrupts are prohibited (S002), and a normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) is executed. In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003), 1 is added to the counter value of various random numbers related to the normal symbol related determination information and the special symbol related determination information and updated. When the counter value of each random number reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. At least part of each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit such as a counter IC.

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S004). During the interruption permission, it is possible to execute the game control side timer interruption process (S005). The game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the game CPU 102 at a cycle of, for example, 4 msec. That is, the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) is executed at a cycle of 4 msec. Then, after the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) is completed, until the next game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) is started, by normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (S003) Various random number counter values are updated repeatedly. It should be noted that, if an interrupt pulse is input to the game CPU 102 when the interrupt is disabled, the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is permitted (S004). .

[Game control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) will be described. As shown in FIG. 34, in the game control side timer interrupt process (S005), the output process (S101) is first executed. In the output process (S101), commands set in an output buffer provided in the game RAM 104 of the game control board 100 in each process described below are output to the effect control board 120, the payout control board 170, and the like.

In the input process (S102) that follows the output process (S101), the game control microcomputer 101 captures the detection signal from the lower tray full switch for detecting the fullness of the surplus ball storage hole 35A, and uses it as the lower tray fullness data for the game. stored in the output buffer of the RAM 104 for use.

The normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed next is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) performed in the game control main process of FIG. That is, the updating process of the counter value of various random numbers related to the general figure-related determination information and the special figure-related determination information includes the execution period of the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) and the other period (main side timer interrupt processing ( After the end of S005), it is performed in both the period until the next game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) is started).

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103), the game control microcomputer 101 performs sensor detection process (S104), then performs normal operation process (S105), and further performs special operation process (S106). conduct. Sensor detection processing, normal operation processing, and special operation processing will be described later.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes other processing (S107) and terminates the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005). As other processing (S107), a power-off monitoring process when the power is turned off, a timer provided in the game RAM 104, and the like are performed. Further, as other processing (S107), a payout control processing for paying out prize balls to the player is performed. In the payout control process, the prize ball counter for the first start port 11, the prize ball counter for the second start port 12, the prize ball counter for the big winning port 14, and the prize ball counter for the general winning port 10 are " It is checked whether or not it exceeds "0", and if it exceeds "0", a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control board 170.例文帳に追加Then, when a prize ball signal is transmitted, update processing is performed to subtract "1" from the prize ball counter associated with the signal.

Then, the game control microcomputer 101 repeatedly executes the processing of steps S002 to S004 of the game control main processing until an interrupt pulse is input to the game CPU 102 next time, and when the interrupt pulse is input (after about 4 msec ), the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) is executed again. The game control microcomputer 101 is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 in the previous game control side timer interrupt process (S005) in the output process (S101) of the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) executed again. command etc.

[Sensor detection processing]
Next, sensor detection processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG. In the sensor detection process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning opening 10, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the general winning opening sensor 10a (S201). If the game ball has not entered the general winning hole 10 (NO at S201), the process proceeds to step S203, and if the game ball has entered the general winning hole 10 (YES at S201), a predetermined number of game balls General winning hole prize ball processing for paying out prize balls is performed (S202). In the general winning hole prize ball processing, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning of the general winning hole 10 (“3” in the basic embodiment) is added to the prize ball counter for the general winning hole 10 .

In step S203, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 13, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 13a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 13 (NO in S203), the process proceeds to step S207. On the other hand, if the game ball has passed through the gate 13 (YES in S203), whether or not the normal operation status = 1, which will be described later, in other words, whether either the normal pattern variable display or the auxiliary game is being performed It is determined whether or not (S204). If the normal operation status is not 1 (NO at S204), proceed to step S207, and if the normal operation status is 1 (YES at S204), the counter value of the normal design random number counter (label-TRND-F) (S205), the obtained general pattern random number is stored in the general pattern reservation storage unit 86 provided in the game RAM 104 (S206), and step S207 proceed to

In step S207, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second start hole 12, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second start hole sensor 12a. If the game ball has not entered the second start port 12 (NO at S207), the process proceeds to step S214, and if the game ball has entered the second start port 12 (YES at S207), the predetermined A second starting hole prize ball process for paying out the number of prize balls is performed (S208). In the second starting hole prize ball processing, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning to the second starting hole 12 (“2” in the first embodiment) is added to the prize ball counter for the second starting hole 12 .

Next, the special figure 2 reservation number (specifically, the number of the counter (special figure 2 reservation number counter) that counts the special figure 2 reservation number provided in the game RAM 104) is "4" (upper limit storage number) or more It is determined whether or not there is (S209). If the special figure 2 reservation number is "4" or more (YES in S209), the process proceeds to step S214, but if the special figure 2 reservation number is not "4" or more (is less than "4") ( NO in S209), special figure 2 reservation number addition processing is performed (S210). In the special figure 2 reservation number addition process, "1" is added to the special figure 2 reservation number counter, and the special figure 2 reservation number indicated by the special figure 2 reservation display 83b is increased by "1".

Subsequently, special pattern random number counter (label - TRND-T), jackpot pattern type random number counter (label - TRND-OS), reach random number counter (label - TRND-RC) and special pattern variation pattern random number counter (label - TRND- HP) to acquire the special figure 2 related determination information consisting of, and stored in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the game RAM 104 (S211).

Next, a second prefetch determination process is performed (S212). In the second look-ahead determination process, the second look-ahead determination table shown in FIG. A second start winning command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 .

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211 in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b (S213).

Subsequently, in step S214, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first start hole 11, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first start hole sensor 11a. If the game ball has not entered the first start port 11 (NO at S214), the process proceeds to step S221, and if the game ball has entered the first start port 11 (YES at S214), the predetermined A first start opening prize ball process for paying out the number of prize balls is performed (S215). In the first start hole prize ball processing, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning to the first start hole 11 ("4" in the first embodiment) is added to the prize ball counter for the first start hole 11.

Next, the special figure 1 reservation number (specifically, the number of the counter (special figure 1 reservation number counter) that counts the number of special figure 1 reservations provided in the game RAM 104) is "4" (upper limit storage number) or more (S216). If the special figure 1 reservation number is "4" or more (YES in S216), the process proceeds to step S221, but if the special figure 1 reservation number is not "4" or more (less than) (NO in S216 ), special figure 1 reservation number addition processing is performed (S217). In the special figure 1 reservation number addition process, "1" is added to the special figure 1 reservation number counter, and the special figure 1 reservation number indicated by the special figure 1 reservation display 83a is increased by "1".

Subsequently, special pattern random number counter (label - TRND-T), jackpot pattern type random number counter (label - TRND-OS), reach random number counter (label - TRND-RC) and special pattern variation pattern random number counter (label - TRND- HP) to acquire the special figure 1 related determination information consisting of, and stored in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the game RAM 104 (S218).

Next, a first prefetch determination process is performed (S219). In the first look-ahead determination process, the first look-ahead determination table shown in FIG. A first start winning command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 .

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 in a storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reservations in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a (S220).

In step S221, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the big winning hole 14, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the big winning hole sensor 14a. When the game ball has not entered the big winning hole 14 (NO at S221), the sensor detection process is terminated, and when the game ball has entered the big winning hole 14 (YES at S221) It is determined whether or not the counter value of the provided big winning opening winning counter is equal to or greater than "9" (S222). The big winning opening winning counter is a counter for counting the number of winning big winning openings 14 in one round game of the big winning game. It should be noted that the big winning opening winning counter is cleared every time each round game ends. In the first embodiment, the specified winning number is set to "10". Therefore, the process of step S222 is performed.

If the counter value of the big winning opening winning counter is "11" or more (YES in S222), the sensor detection process is terminated, and the counter value of the big winning opening winning counter is not "11" or more, that is, less than "11". If so (NO in S222), the counter value of the big winning opening winning counter is incremented by "1" (S223), and the big winning opening prize ball processing for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls to the player is performed (S224). ), ending the sensor detection process. Incidentally, in the big winning hole prize ball processing, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning to the big winning hole 14 (“9” in the first embodiment) is added to the prize ball counter for the big winning hole 14 .

A sensor other than the sensors 10a to 14a is provided as a sensor capable of detecting the game ball, and based on the detection of the game ball by the sensor, processes other than the processes shown in FIGS. 35 to 36 are performed. Also good.

[Normal operation processing]
Next, a description will be given of normal operation processing relating to the control of the normal map display 82 and the electric chew 12D. As shown in FIG. 37, the processing relating to the normal map display 82 and the electric chew 12D is divided into four statuses (steps). "Normal operation status=1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these statuses. The game control microcomputer 101 first confirms the "normal operation status" in the normal operation process (S105) (S1101). When the "normal operation status" is "1", normal design standby processing (S1102) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "2", normal design variation processing (S1103) is performed, When the "normal operation status" is "3", the normal symbol determination process (S1104) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "4", the auxiliary game control process (S1105) is performed. "Normal operation status" is set to "1" by default.

The normal symbol standby process (S1102) is a process performed during standby when the normal symbol variable display and auxiliary game are not performed. In the normal design standby process (S1102), hit determination is performed based on the normal design random number stored in the normal design reservation storage unit 86. Further, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is determined based on the current game state, and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is determined, and the normal pattern fluctuation display of the normal pattern fluctuation time corresponding to the determined normal pattern fluctuation pattern is displayed on the normal pattern display 82. and change the normal operation status to "2". Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a normal pattern fluctuation start command according to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination result in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display.

The normal symbol variation process (S1103) is a process performed when the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the normal pattern fluctuation process (S1103), it is determined whether or not the normal pattern fluctuation time has elapsed since the normal pattern fluctuation display being executed started (whether or not the normal pattern fluctuation display is terminated). If it is determined that the figure fluctuation time has passed, the normal figure stop display is performed based on the hit determination result, and the normal operation status is changed to "3". Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a normal pattern fluctuation stop command in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display.

The normal design determination process (S1104) is a process performed when the normal pattern is stopped and displayed. In the normal pattern determination process (S1104), whether or not a predetermined stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the normal pattern being executed started (whether to end the stop display of the normal pattern) or not), and if it is determined that the predetermined stop time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern that is stopped and displayed is a winning pattern. If it is not a winning pattern (if the stopped normal pattern is a losing pattern), the normal operation status is changed to "1". On the other hand, if the winning pattern is stopped and displayed, the normal operation status is changed to "4", and the auxiliary game is started based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 sets an auxiliary game start command in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the start of the auxiliary game.

Auxiliary game control processing (S1105) is processing that is performed when the auxiliary game is being performed. In the auxiliary game control process (S1105), the auxiliary game is controlled based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Then, when the auxiliary game ends, the normal operation status is changed to "1".

[Special action processing]
Next, the special operation processing regarding the control of the special figure indicator 81, the special figure reservation indicator 83 and the big winning device 14D will be described. As shown in FIG. 38, the processing relating to the special figure indicator 81, the special figure reservation indicator 83 and the big winning device 14D is divided into five statuses (steps). "Special action status=1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these statuses. The game control microcomputer 101 first confirms the "special action status" (S1501).

When the "special action status" is "1", the game control microcomputer 101 performs special symbol standby processing (S1502), and when the "special action status" is "2", the special symbol variation. Processing (S1503) is performed, and when the "special action status" is "3", a special symbol determination process (S1504) is performed, and when the "special action status" is "4", jackpot game control Processing (S1505) is performed, and when the "special action status" is "5", game state setting processing (S1506) is performed. The "special operation status" is set to "1" by default.

The special symbol standby process (S1502) is a process performed during standby when the special symbol variable display and the jackpot game are not performed. The special symbol standby process will be detailed later.

Special design fluctuation processing (S1503) is the processing which is done when the special design is indicated fluctuatingly. The special symbol variation processing will be detailed later.

The special symbol determination process (S1504) is a process performed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The special design confirmation processing will be described in detail later.

The jackpot game control process (S1505) is a process performed in the jackpot game. A game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game according to a jackpot game control table by performing jackpot game control processing. The special action status is changed to "5" when the jackpot game ends. In addition, when each round game is started, a round number specifying command indicating the number of rounds is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 . Also, when all the round games are finished and the ending is started, an ending command indicating the ending corresponding to the jackpot pattern related to the jackpot game is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 . The state in which the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special action status "4" and controls the jackpot game is the "jackpot game state", and the fact that the special action status "4" is set is the "jackpot game state”.

The game state setting process (S1506) is a process of setting the game state to be controlled after the big win game when the big win game ends. For example, when controlling in a high probability state after a jackpot game, a high probability flag is turned on in the high probability flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the high probability state. Furthermore, at this time, if the duration of the high-probability state is limited, the duration is also set. For example, if the end condition of the high probability state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display, the number (hereinafter referred to as "high probability specified number of times") is set in the high probability remaining number counter provided in the game RAM 104 . In addition, when controlling in the time saving state after the jackpot game, the time saving flag is turned ON in the time saving flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the time saving state. Furthermore, at this time, when limiting the duration of the time saving state, the duration is also set. For example, when the end condition of the time saving state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display, the number (hereinafter referred to as "time saving prescribed number of times") is set to the time saving remaining number counter provided in the game RAM 104.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a game state command indicating a game state after the jackpot game in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 in the game state setting process.

[Special symbol standby process]
Next, the special symbol standby process will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol standby process (S1502), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 reservation number is "0" (S1601). If the special figure 2 pending number is "0" (YES in S1601), that is, if there is no storage of the special figure 2 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the second start port 12, the special figure It is determined whether or not the number of 1 pending is "0" (S1608). And, if the special figure 1 pending number is also "0" (YES in S1608), that is, if there is no storage of the special figure 1 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the first start port 11, It is determined whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1618). Here, if the customer waiting flag is ON (YES at S1618), the special symbol waiting process is finished, and if the customer waiting flag is not ON (NO at S1618), a customer waiting command is set in the output buffer (S1619). , turns on the customer waiting flag (S1620), and ends the special symbol standby process.

Also, if the special figure 2 reservation number is "0" but the special figure 1 reservation number is not "0" (YES in S1601 and NO in S1608), that is, there is no special figure 2 related determination information, but the first start When there is one or more storage of special figure 1 related determination information acquired due to winning to mouth 11, special figure 1 determination processing (S1609) and special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing (S1610) are performed.

In the special figure 1 determination process (S1609), the special symbol random number stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a is read out first, and is based on the jackpot determination table associated with the game state. Then, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss (big hit determination).

Here, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the jackpot pattern type random number is read out and the jackpot pattern type is determined based on the first jackpot pattern type determination table (jackpot pattern type determination). Then, the jackpot pattern data representing the jackpot pattern type is set in a special buffer provided in the game RAM 104, and the pattern designation command indicating the jackpot pattern type is set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104.例文帳に追加

Also, if the result of the big hit determination is "losing", the losing design data representing the losing is set in the special figure buffer, and the design designation command representing the losing is set in the output buffer.

Next, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the current non-time saving state (S1651). If it is a non-time-saving state (YES in S1651), select the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for non-time-saving state (S1652), then proceed to step S1654, If it is not a non-time-saving state (NO in S1651), time-saving After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the state (S1653), the process proceeds to step S1654.

In step S1654, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the big win determination result is "big win". If it is not a big hit (NO in S1654), the process proceeds to step S1655, and if it is a big hit (YES in S1654), the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (S1659), the process proceeds to step S1660.

In step S1655, the game control microcomputer 101 performs reach determination. In the reach determination, the reach random number is read, and the reach random number is compared with the reach determination table corresponding to the current game state (non-time saving state/time saving state) to determine whether there is reach or not.

The game control microcomputer 101 then determines whether or not the result of reach determination in step S1655 is "with reach" (S1656). If there is a reach (YES in S1656), select the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for loss with reach from the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 (S1658) Then proceed to step S1660, if there is no reach (NO in S1656), check the current special figure 1 pending number, step S1652 or step S1653 in either special figure 1 variation pattern determination table From select the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for reach no loss according to the number of special figure 1 reservations (S1657) and then proceed to step S1660.

The game control microcomputer 101, in step S1660, reads out the special figure variation pattern random number, and compares the special figure variation pattern random number to the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in any of steps S1657 to S1659, Perform special figure 1 variation pattern determination to determine the special figure 1 variation pattern. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special figure 1 variation start command indicating the determined special figure 1 variation pattern to the output buffer (S1661), and special figure variation according to the determined special figure 1 variation pattern Time is set to the special action timer (S1662), the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process is terminated, and the process is returned to the special symbol standby process.

It should be noted that the special action timer is updated by 4 ms in other processes in the game control side timer interrupt process. In addition, the special figure 1 variation start command to be set includes information on the type of special symbol (that it is special figure 1) and the special figure variation pattern determination performed in the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610) Contains information on the results (information on the special figure fluctuation pattern, including information on the presence or absence of reach and special figure fluctuation time).

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special figure 1 indicator 81a to start the variation display of the special figure 1 based on the special figure variation time corresponding to the special figure 1 variation pattern determined in step S1610 (S1611). .

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts one storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a to the side where it is read from the current position, and special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a To clear the storage area (storage area farthest from the side to be read) corresponding to the first reservation in (S1612). In this way, the special figure 1 reservation is digested in the order in which it was reserved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special figure 1 reserved number counter (S1613), and changes the special figure 1 reserved number indicated by the special figure 1 reserved indicator 83a by decreasing it by "1" ( S1614), and changes the special action status to "2" (S1615).

The game control microcomputer 101 subsequently determines whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1616), and if it is ON (YES in S1616), the customer waiting flag is turned OFF (S1617), and special symbol standby processing is performed. If it is not ON (NO in S1616), the special symbol standby process is finished without executing step S1617.

Also, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not "0" in step S1601 (NO in S1601), that is, the storage of special figure 2 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the second start port 12 is one or more If there is, special figure 2 determination processing (S1602) and special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing (S1603) are performed. Special figure 2 determination processing (S1602) and special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing (S1603) are basically the same processing content as special figure 1 determination processing (S1609) and special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing (S1610) .

Special figure 2 determination processing (S1602), except that the table used in the jackpot determination is the second jackpot determination table, and the table used in the jackpot symbol type determination is the second jackpot symbol type determination table. Since it is the same processing as the special figure 1 determination processing (S1609), the description is omitted. Also, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S1603) is basically the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process ( Since this is the same processing as in S1610), the description is omitted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special figure 2 indicator 81b to start the variation display of the special figure 2 based on the special figure variation time corresponding to the special figure variation pattern determined in step S1603 (S1604).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts one storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b to the side where it is read from the current position, and special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b To clear the storage area (storage area farthest from the side to be read) corresponding to the 4th reservation in (S1605). In this way, the special figure 2 reservations are digested in the order they were reserved.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special figure 2 reserved number counter (S1606), and changes the special figure 2 reserved number indicated by the special figure 2 reserved indicator 83b by decreasing "1" (S1607 ), change the special action status to "2" (S1615), and proceed to step S1616.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the variable display of the special symbols based on the special figure 1 reservation is performed only when the special figure 2 reservation is "0" (YES in S1601). That is, the digestion of Toku-zu 2 pending is executed with priority over the digestion of Toku-zu 1 pending. In the first embodiment, the lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation makes it easier for the player to win a big winning pattern that is more profitable than the lottery based on the special figure 1 reservation. In addition, the digestion of the special figure 1 reservation may be executed with priority over the digestion of the special figure 2 reservation. In addition, the digestion of the special figure 1 reservation and the digestion of the special figure 2 reservation may be performed in the order in which the reservation occurred regardless of the type of special figure.

[Special symbol variation processing]
Next, the special symbol variation processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the variation display of the special symbols, that is, the special symbol variation time set in the special operation timer in step S1603 or step S1610 has passed (special It is determined whether or not the operation counter=0) (S1701). If the special symbol variation display is not terminated (NO at S1701), the special symbol variation processing is terminated, and if the special symbol variation display is terminated (YES at S1701), the special symbol variable display is performed on the special symbol display device 81. is terminated, and a special symbol corresponding to the symbol data (big hit symbol data or losing special symbol data) set in the special symbol buffer at step S1602 or step S1609 is displayed (S1702).

Subsequently, a preset special figure determination time (for example, 0.8 seconds) is set in the special action timer (S1703), and a special figure fluctuation stop command indicating that the special symbol fluctuation display is finished is output to the buffer. (S1704), the special operation status is changed to "3" (S1705), and the special symbol variation process is terminated.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG. The game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the stop display of the special symbols in the special symbol determination process (S1504), that is, the special symbol determination time set in the special operation timer in step S1703 has elapsed (special It is determined whether or not operation counter=0) (S1751). If the special symbol stop display is not terminated (NO in S1751), the special symbol determination process is terminated, and if the special symbol stop display is terminated (YES in S1751), the current normal probability state (high probability flag is OFF) (S1752).

If the game control microcomputer 101 is not currently in the normal probability state (NO in S1752), it proceeds to step S1757, and if it is in the normal probability state (YES in S1752), it is in the time saving state (the time saving flag is ON). It is determined whether or not (S1753). If the game control microcomputer 101 is not in the time saving state (NO in S1753), it proceeds to step S1757. "1" is subtracted from the value of the time saving remaining number counter that measures the number of times (time saving remaining number of times) (S1754), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving remaining number counter is "0" (S1755). If the value of the time saving remaining number counter (time saving remaining number of times) is not "0" (NO in S1755), proceed to step S1757. YES), the time saving state is shifted to the non-working time saving state (the time saving flag is turned OFF) (S1756), and the process proceeds to step S1757.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 confirms the current game state, sets a game state command indicating the game state in the output buffer (S1757), and determines whether or not the special symbol that is currently stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol. (S1758). If it is not a jackpot pattern (NO in S1758), the special action status is changed to "1" (S1762), the special pattern determination process is finished, and if it is a jackpot pattern (YES in S1758), the gaming state is reset ( The normal game state is set.Specifically, the high probability flag and the time saving flag are turned off, and the values of the high probability remaining number counter and the time saving remaining number counter are set to "0" (S1759).

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game preparation process (S1760), changes the special action status to "4" (S1761), and ends the special symbol determination process. The game control microcomputer 101 sets a jackpot game control table corresponding to the jackpot symbol type in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104 in the jackpot game preparation process. In addition, a jackpot opening flag indicating that the opening corresponding to the stopped jackpot pattern is in progress is turned on in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and a predetermined opening time (jackpot game starts) is set according to the type of the jackpot pattern. set the time from when the player is done to the start of one round) in the special action timer. Furthermore, according to the type of the jackpot pattern, an opening command indicating the type of the jackpot pattern is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 . The opening command corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol indicates that the jackpot game (opening of the jackpot game) corresponding to the type of the stop-displayed jackpot symbol is started.

6. Control of production by production control board 120 [Production control main processing]
Next, the control of the effect by the effect control board 120 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 43 to 47. FIG. It should be noted that the flowchart for controlling the effects described below is an example. A plurality of processes in the flowchart can be executed in parallel or changed in execution order as appropriate within a range in which the contents of the processes are not inconsistent.

Also, counters, timers, flags, buffers, etc. appearing in the description of the control of the effect by the effect control board 120 below are provided in the RAM 124 for effect. The effect control microcomputer 121 provided in the effect control board 120 reads out and executes the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 43 from the effect ROM 123 when the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on.

As shown in the figure, in the effect control main process, first, power-on processing corresponding to power-on is performed (S4001). In the power-on process, for example, settings of the performance CPU 122, settings of SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc. are performed.

Next, interrupts are prohibited (S4002), and random number seed update processing is executed (S4003). In the random number seed update process (S4003), the values of various effect determination random number counters for making determinations regarding various effects are updated. It should be noted that the random numbers for effect determination include various random numbers for determining the effect contents such as random numbers for stop symbol pattern determination and special figure variation effect pattern determination random numbers, which will be described later.

As an example of a method for updating the determination random number counter for various effects, the same method as the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 can be used. Instead of adding 1 to the random value at the time of updating, it is also possible to add 2 at a time. This also applies to the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 described above.

When the random number seed update process ends, command transmission process is executed (S4004). In the command transmission process, various commands stored in the output buffer in the production RAM 124 of the production control board 120 (for example, a special figure fluctuation production start command, a customer waiting start command, an opening production start command, a round production start, which will be described later) command, ending effect start command, etc.) to the image control board 140.

The image control board 140 that has received the command displays an image on the display section 50a according to the received command (performs various effects based on the image). In addition to the various effects performed by the image control board 140, the effect control board 120 outputs sound from the speaker 52 via the sound control circuit 161 (executes various sound effects), and the sub-drive board. Via 162, the frame lamp 53 is lit (executing various effects by light emission), and the board movable body 55k is operated (executing various effects by action). In addition, various effects include a special figure variation effect, a jackpot game effect (big hit opening effect, round effect, jackpot ending effect), a customer waiting effect, an operation effect, and a look-ahead effect.

The effect control microcomputer 121 subsequently permits an interrupt (S4005). Thereafter, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4010), 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) can be executed. The 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011) and the 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) will be described later.

The reception interrupt process (S4010) is executed each time a strobe signal, that is, various commands sent from the game control board 100 is input to the external INT input section of the effect control microcomputer 121. In the reception interrupt process (S4010), the effect control microcomputer 121 stores various commands transmitted and received by the output process (S101) of the game control board 100 in the receive buffer of the effect RAM124. This reception interrupt process is executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4011, S4012).

[1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, 1 ms timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. The 1ms timer interrupt process (S4011) is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a 1msec cycle is input to the effect control board 120. The effect control microcomputer 121 first performs input processing (S4101) in the 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011). In the input process, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates the first effect button switch data based on the detection signal from the first effect button sensor 40a. The effect control microcomputer 121 creates second effect button switch data based on the detection signal from the second effect button sensor 41a.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs light emission data output processing (S4102). In the light emission data output process, the effect control microcomputer 121 outputs the light emission data created in the light emission data creation process (S4203) in the 10ms timer interrupt process described later in order to cause the frame lamp 53 to emit light at a timing suitable for the image effect. is output to the sub-drive board 162 . That is, the effect control microcomputer 121 causes the frame lamp 53 to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the light emission data.

Next, the production control microcomputer 121 performs mobile device control processing (S4103). In the movable device control process, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates or outputs drive data (data for driving the movable board 55k) in order to drive the movable board 55k at a predetermined timing. That is, the effect control microcomputer 121 drives the board movable body 55k in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data.

Next, the production control microcomputer 121 performs timer update processing (S4104). In the timer update process, various timers provided in the performance RAM 124, which will be described later, are updated in order to manage and control the time relating to various predetermined performances. In this process, the timer provided in the effect RAM 124 is updated by 1 msec.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs watchdog timer processing for resetting the watchdog timer (S4105), and ends the 1ms timer interrupt processing.

[10 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10ms timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. The 10ms timer interrupt process (S4012) is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a 10msec cycle is input to the effect control board 120. Effect control microcomputer 121, in the 10ms timer interrupt process, first performs a received command analysis process for analyzing the command stored in the receive buffer in step S4010 (S4201). The received command analysis processing will be described in detail in a first embodiment described later.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs voice control processing (S4202). In the audio control process, based on the effect content indicated by the special figure fluctuation effect data set in the effect RAM 124, etc., the audio data (data for controlling the output of the sound from the speaker 52) is created and sent to the audio control circuit 161. is output.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs light emission data creation processing (S4203). In the light emission data creation process, the light emission data is created based on the effect content indicated by the special figure variation effect data set in the effect RAM 124 and the like.

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47. FIG. Production control microcomputer 121, in the received command analysis process, first, from the game control board 100 start winning command (first starting winning command or second starting winning command) received or not, in other words, received starting winning command It is determined whether or not the data is stored in the buffer (S4301). If the effect control microcomputer 121 has received the start winning command (YES at S4301), it proceeds to step S4302.

In step S4302, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs start winning process in response to the game ball winning the first start hole 11 or the second start hole 12. FIG. In the start winning process, the received starting winning command is stored in the starting winning command reserve storage unit 125 in the RAM 124 for performance. Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the stored start winning command and determines whether or not to execute a look-ahead effect indicating the degree of expectation for a big hit. The look-ahead effect includes, in addition to a pending notice of displaying a pending icon in a special mode, a continuous notice effect performed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of special symbols. When it is decided to execute these look-ahead effects, a look-ahead effect start command for executing the determined effect is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for effect.

When the pre-reading effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 outputs a predetermined effect from the image ROM 142. The image is read out, and the display section 50a of the image display device 50 performs a look-ahead effect using the image. Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs voice control according to the content of the prefetch effect indicated by the prefetch effect start command transmitted to the image control board 140 while the image control board 140 is performing the prefetch effect by the image. A sound is output from the speaker 52 via the circuit 161 (performs the prefetch effect by the sound), and the frame lamp 53 is emitted via the sub-drive board 162 (performs the prefetch effect by light emission), and the board movable body It is possible to activate 55k (perform a look-ahead effect by action).

In step S4303, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the design designation command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the design designation command is stored in the reception buffer. If the design designation command is not received (NO at S4303), the effect control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S4305. is stored in the pattern designation command storage unit 126 (S4304).

In step S4305, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation start command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the special figure fluctuation start command is stored in the reception buffer. If the special figure fluctuation start command is not received (NO in S4305), while proceeding to step S4307, if the special figure fluctuation start command is received (YES in S4305), the production contents of the special figure fluctuation production are determined. , Special figure fluctuation production start processing (S4306) for starting the special figure fluctuation production is performed.

The production control microcomputer 121 first stores a special figure fluctuation start command in the special figure fluctuation start command storage unit 127 in the production RAM 124 in the special figure fluctuation production start processing. Next, based on the contents of the stop special figure indicated by the symbol designation command already stored in step S4304 (type of jackpot symbol, loss special figure) and the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation start command, the effect symbol EZ1 to be stopped and displayed to EZ3, and the stop symbol pattern determination table for determining the stop symbol to determine the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. A plurality of stop symbol pattern determination tables are provided in association with special figures and special figure variation patterns. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects one stop symbol pattern determination table associated with the stop special figure and the special figure variation pattern. In each stop design pattern determination table, a plurality of production designs EZ1 to EZ3 and small designs KZ1 to KZ3 have a random number value for stop design pattern determination (stop design pattern determination) so as to have a predetermined allocation rate (%). value) are distributed. Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the stop symbol pattern determination random number counter as the stop symbol pattern determination random number, and performs stop symbol pattern determination based on the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random number.

The performance control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random number with the selected stop symbol pattern table in the stop symbol pattern determination, and determines the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 to be stopped and displayed. Then, data representing the determined performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are set in a predetermined area of the RAM 124 for performance. For example, a combination of performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected so that the special figure variation pattern is a reach-less loss variation, so-called "separate eyes". In addition, if the special figure fluctuation pattern is reach and loss fluctuation, the left production pattern EZ1 and the right production pattern EZ3 are the same, and the middle production pattern EZ2 is different from them. A KZ3 combination is selected. Furthermore, if the special figure variation pattern is a big hit variation, a combination of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 and the small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 is selected so that it becomes a so-called "double eye" according to the production mode and the type of the big hit pattern. .

Next, the production control microcomputer 121 selects a special figure fluctuation production pattern in which the production contents of the special figure fluctuation production are associated based on the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the staying production mode and the special figure fluctuation start command. A special figure variation performance pattern determination table for performing special figure variation performance pattern determination to be determined is selected. A plurality of special figure fluctuation effect pattern determination tables are provided in association with the effect mode and the special figure fluctuation pattern. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 121 selects one special figure fluctuation production pattern determination table associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern. In each special figure fluctuation production pattern determination table, one or more special figure fluctuation production pattern has a random number value for special figure fluctuation production pattern judgment (special figure fluctuation production pattern judgment value) are distributed. Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the special figure fluctuation production pattern determination random number counter as a special figure fluctuation production pattern judgment random number, and special figure based on the acquired special figure fluctuation production pattern judgment random number. Variation performance pattern determination is performed.

In the special figure fluctuation production pattern determination, the production control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired special figure fluctuation production pattern determination random number with the selected special figure fluctuation production pattern table, determines the special figure fluctuation production pattern, and determines. Data representing the special figure variation performance pattern is set in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, and a special figure variation performance start command indicating the special figure variation performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. - 特許庁

When the special figure variation effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives a predetermined amount from the image ROM 142. The effect image is read out, and the display unit 50a of the image display device 50 performs a special figure variation effect by the image.

In addition, the special figure fluctuation production start command includes information regarding the production flow associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the special figure fluctuation start command. In addition to the special figure fluctuation production start command by the image performed by the image display device 50, the special figure fluctuation production by the sound output from the speaker 52, the special figure by the light emission performed by the frame lamp 53 The contents of the figure fluctuation production and the contents of the special figure fluctuation production by the action performed by the board movable body 55k are included.

In addition, the production control microcomputer 121, while the special figure fluctuation production by the image performed by the image control board 140 is being performed, the special figure fluctuation production contents indicated by the special figure fluctuation production start command transmitted to the image control board 140 In response, output the sound from the speaker 52 through the voice control circuit 161 (execute the special figure fluctuation effect by the sound), and emit the frame lamp 53 through the sub-drive board 162 (special figure by light emission (performs the variation performance), and operates the board movable body 55k (performs the special figure variation performance by the action).

In step S4307, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop command is stored in the reception buffer. Production control microcomputer 121, if the special figure fluctuation stop command is not received (NO in S4307), while proceeding to step S4309, if the special figure fluctuation stop command is received (YES in S4307), special figure fluctuation A special figure fluctuation production end process (S4308) for ending the production (stopping the variable display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 and the small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 and performing stop display) is performed.

The production control microcomputer 121 analyzes the special figure fluctuation stop command in the special figure fluctuation production end processing, and appropriately ends the special figure fluctuation production based on the analysis result (production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 and small pattern KZ1 To stop the fluctuation display of ~KZ3) set the special figure fluctuation effect end command to the output buffer of the RAM 124 for effect. When the image control board 140 receives the special figure variation effect end command, it ends the special figure variation effect being executed (stops the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 being changed).

In step S4309, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the game state command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the game state command is stored in the reception buffer. If the game state command is not received (NO in S4309), the effect control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S4311, and if the game state command is received (YES in S4309), the game state command is analyzed. , to specify the game state represented by the game state command, and perform a game state setting process for setting the game state (S4310).

The effect control microcomputer 121 sets a game state flag corresponding to the game state indicated by the game state command in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124 in the game state setting process. For example, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag “00H” in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124 if the game state indicated by the game state command is the normal game state. Also, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag “01H” in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124 if the game state indicated by the game state command is the high probability high base game state. Furthermore, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag “02H” in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124 if the game state indicated by the game state command is the low probability high base game state.

In step S4311, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the customer waiting command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the customer waiting command is stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the customer waiting command (NO at S4311), it proceeds to step S4313, and if it has received the customer waiting command (YES at S4311), the customer waiting production standby process is performed. (S4312), the received command analysis process ends.

In the customer waiting effect waiting process, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the waiting time (customer waiting effect waiting time: for example, 20 seconds) from the stop display of the effect pattern to the start of the customer waiting effect as the customer waiting effect. Set a timer. Note that the effect control microcomputer 121 can determine whether or not this waiting time has passed. output buffer.

In step S4313, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the opening command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the opening command is stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 121 has not received the opening command (NO in S4313), while proceeding to step S4315, if the opening command has been received (YES in S4313), the jackpot associated with the start of the opening of the jackpot game Opening effect start processing is performed (S4314).

The performance control microcomputer 121 analyzes the opening command in the jackpot opening performance start processing, and determines whether or not to execute the jackpot opening performance corresponding to the opening of the jackpot game to be executed based on the analysis result. If it is to be executed, the performance content of the jackpot opening performance (jackpot opening performance pattern) is selected, and a jackpot opening performance start command for starting the jackpot opening performance in the selected jackpot opening performance pattern is output from the performance RAM 124. set in the buffer.

In step S4315, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the round number designation command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the round number designation command is stored in the reception buffer. If the round number designation command is not received (NO in S4315), while proceeding to step S4317, if the round number designation command is received (YES in S4315), the round production start processing is performed along with the start of the round game. (S4316).

In the round effect start processing, the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the round number designation command, determines whether or not to execute the round effect corresponding to the round game to be started from now on, and executes the round effect if it is to be executed. (round performance pattern) is selected, and a round performance start command corresponding to the selected round performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for performance.

In step S4317, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the ending command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the ending command is stored in the reception buffer. If the ending command has not been received (NO at S4317), while ending the received command analysis process, if the ending command has been received (YES at S4317), the jackpot ending effect start processing accompanying the start of the jackpot game ending ( After performing S4318) and effect mode setting processing (S4319), the received command analysis processing ends.

The effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the ending command in the jackpot ending effect start processing, determines whether or not to execute the jackpot ending effect according to the ending of the jackpot game to be executed from now on, and executes it. The performance contents of the jackpot ending performance (jackpot ending performance pattern) are selected, and a jackpot ending performance start command corresponding to the selected jackpot ending performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for performance.

In addition, in the effect mode setting process, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the effect mode after the jackpot game based on the analysis result of the ending command, specifically, the jackpot pattern indicated by the ending command (the effect mode is set). control).

For example, when the jackpot pattern indicated by the jackpot ending command is the jackpot patterns A, B or the jackpot patterns D, E, the performance control microcomputer 121 sets a variable probability performance mode suggesting a high-probability high-base game state. Then, a performance mode flag indicating the variable probability performance mode is turned on in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, and a variable probability performance mode start command indicating setting of the variable probability performance mode is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for performance. When the probability variable effect mode start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is at the timing when the ending ends. , the background image G120 for probability variation is displayed as the background image, and BGM for probability variation is output as BGM.

In addition, when the jackpot pattern indicated by the jackpot ending command is the jackpot pattern C or the jackpot pattern F, the performance control microcomputer 121 sets a time-saving performance mode suggesting a low-probability high-base game state. Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 turns ON the effect mode flag indicating the time saving effect mode in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and outputs a time saving effect mode start command indicating that the time saving effect mode is set to the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. set to When the time-saving production mode start command set in the output buffer of the production RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is at the timing when the ending ends. , the time saving background image G130 is displayed as the background image, and the time saving BGM is output as the BGM.

<First Embodiment>
Next, a first embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment according to the present invention described above. In the following, as the first embodiment, mainly the points different from the basic embodiment will be described. In addition, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as in the basic embodiment, or similarly corresponding configurations.

First, the general feature points of the first embodiment will be described from the viewpoint of game playability. In the basic embodiment, either "big hit" or "losing" is determined in the big hit determination, but in the first embodiment, "small hit" is determined in addition to "big hit" and "losing" Sometimes it is done. In other words, in the first embodiment, there is provided a "small win" that was never determined in the big win determination in the basic embodiment.

In addition, although details will be described later, as a result of the jackpot determination in the jackpot determination, when it is determined to be a "small hit", in the same way as when it is determined to be a "jackpot" and "losing", a special figure variation pattern is determined. Then, the special figure variable display is performed based on the special figure variation pattern. In the special figure variable display, finally, the stop display of the "small winning pattern" indicating that the "small winning" has been won is performed. That is, in the special figure variable display, "small hit" is derived as a big hit determination result. Then, when the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed, the small winning game is executed.

In the small winning game, the big winning opening 14 is opened. That is, the small winning game is a game involving the opening of the big winning opening 14 . A game state in which a small winning game is performed may be referred to as a "small winning gaming state". In the small winning game state, the big winning opening 14 having a larger number of prize balls than the first starting opening 11 and the second starting opening 12 is opened, so that the small winning game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. It can also be positioned as a game state. In addition, in the small winning game state, the execution of the special figure variable display is regulated, specifically prohibited. Then, when the small winning game state ends, it becomes possible to start a new special figure variable display. Details of the small winning game state will be described later.

In addition, in the basic embodiment, a non-time-saving state and a time-saving state are provided as a game state related to the ease of opening the second start port 12 (ease of opening). The advantageous time-saving state is set according to winning a jackpot and ending the jackpot game state. That is, the end of the jackpot gaming state (jackpot winning or jackpot symbol stop display) is set as the trigger for the occurrence of the time saving state. However, in the first embodiment, as a trigger for setting the time saving state, in addition to the end of the big winning game state, stop display of the small winning design or stop display of the losing design is also provided.

In addition, in the first embodiment, since only one type of small winning symbol is provided, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the time saving state is always set according to the stopped display. On the other hand, there are four types of losing patterns: a losing pattern A, a losing pattern B, a losing pattern C, and a losing pattern D, and time is reduced according to the stop display of the losing pattern B or the stop display of the losing pattern C. State is set.

In this way, since the time saving state is set according to the stop display of the small winning design, the stop display of the losing design B, and the stop display of the losing design C, the small winning design, the losing design B, and the losing design C are It can be positioned as a special pattern that can set a time saving state.

Also, in the first embodiment, the big hit determination based on the winning to the first start port 11, in other words, it may be determined as "small hit" only in the big hit determination related to the special figure 1 variable display, and the second start In the jackpot determination based on the winning to the mouth 12, in other words, in the jackpot determination related to the special figure 2 variable display, it is not determined as "small hit". Furthermore, the lost pattern that can set the time saving state is determined only when the big hit determination based on the winning to the first start port 11 is determined as "losing". Therefore, basically, in a situation in which the player is left-handed with the aim of winning a prize to the first starting port 11 in a non-time-saving state, the time-saving state can be generated regardless of the jackpot game state.

Next, various tables used by the game control microcomputer 101 for game control, different from the basic embodiment, and tables not used in the basic embodiment will be described. Tables different from the basic embodiment are a jackpot determination table, a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table, and a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. Tables that are not used in the basic embodiment include a losing symbol type determination table, a game state setting table related to the stop display of small winning symbols, a small winning game control table, and a game state setting related to the stop display of losing symbols. There is a table.

First, the big hit determination table will be described. In the first embodiment, the big hit determination in the case of performing the special figure 1 variable display based on the winning to the first starting port 11, and the case of performing the special figure 2 variable display based on the winning to the second starting port 12 A different jackpot determination table is used for the jackpot determination and the jackpot determination. In the following, the former is referred to as "special figure 1 jackpot determination table", and the latter is referred to as "special figure 2 jackpot determination table". In the following, the jackpot determination related to the special figure 1 variable display is referred to as "special figure 1 jackpot determination". In addition, the jackpot determination related to the special figure 2 variable display is referred to as "special figure 2 jackpot determination".

FIG. 48(A) is a configuration example of a special figure 1 jackpot determination table, and FIG. 48(B) is a configuration example of a special figure 2 jackpot determination table. As in the basic embodiment, both the special figure 1 jackpot determination table and the special figure 2 jackpot determination table include a table used in the normal probability state and a table used in the high probability state. That is, the special figure 1 jackpot determination table includes a special figure 1 jackpot determination table for the normal probability state and a special figure 1 jackpot determination table for the high probability state, and the special figure 2 jackpot determination table includes the normal probability state There is a special figure 2 big hit determination table for special figure 2 and a special figure 2 big hit determination table for high probability state.

As shown in FIG. 48 (A), in each special figure 1 big hit determination table, the special symbol random number determination value (special symbol random number determination value) is appropriate for each of the big hit determination result, small hit, and loss. are distributed to Therefore, when the big hit determination is performed in each special figure 1 big hit determination table, it is determined to be either a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 48(B), in each special figure 2 jackpot determination table, the special symbol random number determination value is appropriately distributed to each of the jackpot and loss, which are the jackpot determination results. Therefore, when the big hit determination is performed in each special figure 2 big hit determination table, it is determined to be either a big hit or a loss, and is not determined to be a small hit.

Next, the lost symbol type determination table will be described. As described above, in the first embodiment, a plurality of types of lost symbols are provided. In the following, the type of missing symbol is referred to as a "losing symbol type". The losing symbol type determination table is a table for determining the losing symbol type when the result of the big hit determination is a loss. As with the jackpot symbol type determination table, the losing symbol type determination table (special figure 1 losing symbol type determination table) used when performing special figure 1 variable display and special figure 2 variable display There is a losing design type determination table (special figure 2 losing design type determination table) used when performing. Incidentally, hereinafter, determining the losing symbol type using the losing symbol type determination table is referred to as "losing symbol type determination". Furthermore, determining the type of the missing pattern using the special figure 1 losing pattern type determination table is referred to as "special figure 1 losing design type determination", and the special figure 2 losing design type determination table is used to determine the type of the losing pattern. To do is called "special figure 2 losing design type determination".

Here, the lost symbol type determination will be described. Lost symbol type determination is performed by collating the big hit symbol type determination random number with the lost symbol type determination table in the same manner as the jackpot symbol type determination. That is, a common random number is used in the jackpot symbol type determination and the losing symbol type determination. Therefore, in the first embodiment, the "big hit symbol type determination random number" described in the basic embodiment is referred to as "symbol type determination random number".

In the first embodiment, three types of losing patterns, namely, a losing pattern A, a losing pattern B, and a losing pattern C, are provided as the losing patterns related to the special figure 1, and one of the losing patterns D as the losing pattern related to the special figure 2. There are different types of lost patterns. Then, as shown in FIG. 48(C), in each losing symbol type determination table, a symbol type random number is determined for each losing symbol type so as to have a selection rate for each losing symbol type shown in FIG. 48(C). Values (symbol type random number determination values) are distributed as appropriate.

Next, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table will be described. In the basic embodiment, each of the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is associated with the game state related to the ease of opening the second start port 12. In other words, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table includes the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state and the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the time saving state, and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table There was a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for non-time saving state and a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for time saving state. In the first embodiment, the basic configuration of this special figure variation pattern determination table is common, but the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the time saving state is further subdivided. Specifically, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the time saving state is associated with the opportunity of the time saving state, and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the time saving state after the jackpot gaming state (first time saving state special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for) and special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for time saving state after small hit symbol stop display and losing symbol B stop display (special figure 2 variation pattern determination for second time saving state table), and a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern C (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the 3rd time saving state).

Here, each special figure variation pattern determination table associated with the opportunity of the game state and the game state will be described. FIG. 49 (A) is a configuration example of the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for non-time saving state, FIG. 49 (B) is a configuration example of the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for time saving state, FIG. A) is a configuration example of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state, FIG. 50 (B) is a configuration example of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the first time saving state, FIG. ) is a configuration example of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the second time saving state, and FIG. 51 (B) is a configuration example of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the third time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 49 (A) and FIG. 49 (B), in the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state and the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the time saving state, the jackpot determination result is In addition to the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table when it is a big hit and the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table when the big hit determination result is a loss, special figure 1 variation pattern determination when the big hit determination result is a small hit A table is also included. This is because, as described above, in the first embodiment, the determination result of the special figure 1 big hit determination includes "small hit".

In addition, in the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table when the big hit determination result is a loss, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table in the case of the losing pattern A (special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the losing pattern A) and the losing Special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for design B (special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for losing design B) and special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for losing design C (special figure 1 variation pattern for losing design C decision table) and This is because, as described above, in the first embodiment, there are a plurality of types of losing symbols, and depending on the type of the losing symbols, a time-saving state advantageous to the player occurs after the stop display of the losing symbols. In order to ensure the special figure fluctuation time to some extent, the special figure fluctuation performance that enhances the player's expectation is surely executed. Therefore, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the losing design B and the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the losing design C are not associated with the reach determination result, and as in the case of the big hit, the special figure 1 variation As a pattern determination result, the special figure 1 variation pattern in which the special figure variation effect ends with normal variation is not included. On the other hand, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the loss pattern A is associated with the reach determination result, and is similar to the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table related to the loss for the non-time saving state in the basic embodiment. Furthermore, there are a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the losing pattern A in the case of reach and a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the losing pattern A in the case of no reach.

Next, the game state setting table for newly setting (changing) the game state will be described. In the basic embodiment, when the game state is newly set (changed) according to the end of the jackpot game state, based on the game state setting table associated with the jackpot symbol type related to the jackpot game state The game state is newly set (changed). In the first embodiment, the same is true when the game state is newly set (changed) in response to the termination of the jackpot game state. Also, when the game state is newly set (changed) according to the stop display of the small winning symbol, and when the game state is newly set (changed) according to the stop display of the losing symbol, basically, A game state is newly set (changed) based on the game state setting table.

In the game state setting table when the game state is newly set (changed) according to the stop display of the small winning pattern, the small winning pattern stop display when the small winning pattern is stopped in the non-time saving state game state setting table (non-time-saving small winning symbol stop display game state setting table) and small winning symbol stop display game state setting table (time-saving small There is a game state setting table for winning symbol stop display). That is, the game state is associated with the game state setting table related to the stop display of the small winning symbols.

FIG. 52(A) is a configuration example of a game state setting table for non-time-saving small winning symbol stop display, and FIG. 52(B) is a configuration example of a game state setting table for time-saving small winning symbol stop display. As shown in FIGS. 52(A) and 52(B), according to the game state setting table for non-time-saving small winning symbol stop display, the time-saving state is set according to the stop display of the small winning symbol, but the time-saving small According to the winning symbol stop display game state setting table, the time saving state is not set according to the stop display of the small winning symbol.

In addition, in the game state setting table (game state setting table for the stop display of the losing pattern) when the game state is newly set (changed) according to the stop display of the losing pattern, the stop display of the losing pattern in the non-time saving state A game state setting table for stopping display of losing symbols when is performed (game state setting table for stopping display of non-time-saving losing symbols), and for stopping display of losing symbols when stopping display of losing symbols is performed in a time-saving state There is a game state setting table (game state setting table for time saving lost symbol stop display). FIG. 52(C) is a configuration example of a game state setting table for non-time saving losing symbol stop display, and FIG. 52(D) is a configuration example of a game state setting table for time saving losing symbol stop display. That is, the game state is associated with the game state setting table related to the stop display of the losing symbols.

Furthermore, the game state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol stop display includes a game state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol stop display in the case of losing symbol B (game state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol B stop display), There is a game state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol stop display in the case of losing symbol C (game state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol C stop display), and the game state setting table for time-saving losing symbol stop display , a game state setting table for time-saving losing symbol stop display in case of losing symbol B (game state setting table for time-saving losing symbol B stop display) and a game state setting table for time-saving losing symbol stop display in case of losing symbol C. (Game state setting table for time saving lost symbol C stop display). That is, the gaming state and the losing symbol type are associated with each other in the gaming state setting table relating to the stop display of the losing symbols.

As shown in FIGS. 52(C) and 52(D), according to the game state setting table for non-time-saving losing design B stop display and the game state setting table for non-time-saving losing design C stop display, stop of losing design B The time saving state is set according to the display and the losing pattern C, but according to the game state setting table for the stop display of the time saving losing pattern B and the game state setting table for the stopping display of the time saving losing pattern C, the stop display of the losing pattern B and the The time saving state is not set according to the stop display of the losing pattern C.

In this way, the game state setting table for newly setting (changing) the game state is associated with the jackpot determination result. And the game state setting table related to the small hit and the game state setting table related to the loss are associated with the game state when the special figure stop display is performed. Symbol types are associated with the game state setting table related to the big hit and the game state setting table related to the loss.

In addition, the end condition of the time saving state when the time saving state is set according to the stop display of the small winning pattern, and the end condition of the time saving state when the time saving state is set according to the stop display of the losing pattern B is set to "special figure variable display 150 times". That is, the time-saving state ends when the special figure variable display is executed 150 times without winning the jackpot, and becomes a non-time-saving gaming state. On the other hand, when the time saving state is set according to the stop display of the losing pattern C, the end condition of the time saving state is set to "special figure variable display 50 times". That is, the time-saving state ends when the special figure variable display is executed 50 times without winning the jackpot, and enters a non-time-saving gaming state.

Next, the small winning game control table will be described. The small winning game control table is a table used for controlling a small winning game in which a small winning game is performed. The small winning game includes an opening game involving the opening and closing of the big winning opening 14, an opening (also referred to as OP) from the start of the small winning game to the start of the first open game, and the final open game. Ending (also referred to as ED) from the end of the game to the end of the small winning game. Each open game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous open game, and ends with the start of the next open game or the start of the ending. In addition, the opening game is interposed between the start of the opening and the end of the ending to constitute a small winning game.

FIG. 53 shows a configuration example of a small winning game control table. The small winning game control table stores the elements (small winning game components) that constitute the small winning game. The small winning game components include the number of open games, the opening time (open pattern) of the big winning opening related to each open game, the opening time (opening time), and the ending time (ending time). there is In addition, when there are a plurality of types of small winning games, it is possible to set a small winning game component for each type of small winning game.

According to the small winning game control table, the open game is performed once. Then, in the first embodiment, the big winning opening 14 is opened for 1.8 seconds in the open game. In addition, opening is performed in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 2.0 seconds from the start of the small winning game to the start of the first open game. Further, an ending is performed in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 0.5 seconds from the end of the last open game to the end of the small winning game.

Next, processing performed by the game control microcomputer 101, which differs from the basic embodiment, and processing which is not performed in the basic embodiment will be described. The processing different from the basic embodiment is special operation processing, special symbol standby processing in special operation processing, special figure 1 determination processing, special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing, special figure 2 determination processing, and special figure 2 variation pattern They are the determination process and the special symbol determination process in the special action process. On the other hand, as processing that is not performed in the basic embodiment, there is a game state setting process after displaying a small winning symbol in the special action process, a small winning game control process, and a game state setting process after displaying a losing symbol.

First, special action processing will be described. A special action process according to the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 shows a flowchart of special operation processing. In the special action process according to the first embodiment, the processing relating to the special figure display 81, the special figure reservation display 83 and the big winning device 14D is divided into eight statuses (steps). "Special action status=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8" is assigned to each of these statuses.

When the "special action status" is "1", the game control microcomputer 101 performs special symbol standby processing (S1502), and when the "special action status" is "2", the special symbol variation. Processing (S1503) is performed, and when the "special action status" is "3", a special symbol determination process (S1504) is performed, and when the "special action status" is "4", jackpot game control When the processing (S1505) is performed and the "special action status" is "5", the game state setting process (S1506) is performed after the jackpot game, and when the "special action status" is "6", After displaying the small winning pattern, the game state setting process (S1507) is performed, and when the "special operation status" is "7", the small winning game control process (S1508) is performed, and the "special operation status" is "8". In the case of , a game state setting process (S1509) is performed after displaying the lost symbols. The "special operation status" is set to "1" by default.

"Special symbol variation processing", "jackpot game control process", and "game state setting process after jackpot game state" according to the first embodiment are "special symbol variation processing" and "jackpot game The processing contents are the same as those of the “control processing” and the “game state setting processing”. The processing related to "special action status = 5" is "game state setting processing after jackpot game", which differs from the name in the basic embodiment, but this is the same as the game state in the first embodiment. This is because the name was changed in response to an increase in the number of opportunities to set (change) to , and the processing contents of "special action status = 5" are generally the same. Also, "special figure 1 determination process", "special figure 1 variation pattern determination process", "special figure 2 determination process", and "special figure 2 variation pattern determination process" in the "special symbol standby process" according to the first embodiment ", and "special symbol determination process", "special symbol 1 determination process", "special figure 1 variation pattern determination process", "special figure 2 determination process" in the "special symbol standby process" according to the basic embodiment , And "special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing", and "special design decision processing" and the processing content is different. Details of these processes will be described later.

The post-display game state setting process (S1507) is a process of newly setting (changing) the game state when the stop display of the small winning symbols is completed and the small winning symbols are determined.

Small hit game control processing (S1508) is a process performed in the small hit game. The game control microcomputer 101 performs a small winning game according to the small winning game control table by performing a small winning game control process. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special operation status "7", the state of controlling the small winning game is the "jackpot game state", and the special operation status "4" is set " It is called "small hit game state".

In the game state setting processing after the stop display of the losing symbol (S1509), when the stop display of the losing symbol B and the stop display of the losing symbol C are completed in the non-time saving state and the losing symbol B and the losing symbol C are confirmed, This is the process of setting the game state.

Although the details will be described later, the "special action status" is changed to "6" in the special symbol confirmation process when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, the "special action status" is changed to "8" in the special symbol confirmation processing when the losing symbol B is stopped and displayed and when the losing symbol C is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the game state setting process after displaying the small winning symbols is completed, the "special operation status" is changed to "7", and when the game state setting process is completed after the stopping of the losing symbols, the "special operation status" is changed to "7". is changed to "1". Furthermore, when the small winning game control process ends, the "special action status" is changed to "1".

Next, special figure 1 decision processing and special figure 1 fluctuation pattern decision processing in special design standby processing are explained. First, the special figure 1 determination process will be described. FIG. 55 shows a flowchart of special figure 1 determination processing. As shown in FIG. 55, the game control microcomputer 101, in the special figure 1 determination process, first, as step S1621, determines whether or not the current game state related to the jackpot probability is the normal probability state. When determining that the game control microcomputer 101 is in the normal probability state, in step S1622, while selecting the special figure 1 jackpot determination table for the normal probability state, it is determined that it is not in the normal probability state, that is, in the high probability state Then, in step S1623, the special figure 1 jackpot determination table for the high probability state is selected.

When the special figure 1 jackpot determination table is selected, the game control microcomputer 101 performs special figure 1 jackpot determination based on the selected special figure 1 jackpot determination table in step S1624. In the special figure 1 jackpot determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the first stored special symbol random number stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a, and selects the special figure 1 jackpot determination. The table is collated to determine whether it is a big win, a small win, or a loss.

The game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 jackpot determination is a jackpot in step S1625. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is a jackpot, it selects a special figure 1 jackpot symbol type determination table in step S1626, and performs special figure 1 jackpot symbol type determination in step S1627.

The game control microcomputer 101 reads out the first stored symbol type random number stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a in the special figure 1 jackpot symbol type determination, and determines the special figure 1 jackpot symbol type. The type determination table is collated to determine which jackpot symbol type it is. When the special figure 1 jackpot pattern type determination is performed, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a pattern type flag indicating the jackpot pattern type that is the determination result in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104 in step S1628, and in step S1629, The symbol specifying command indicating the jackpot symbol type as the determination result is set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104, the special symbol 1 determination process is finished, and the process is returned to the special symbol standby process.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is not a big hit in step S1625, it determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 big hit determination is a small hit in step S1630. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is a small hit, in step S1631, it sets a pattern type flag indicating a small hit design in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and in step S1632, a design designation command indicating a small hit design. is set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104, the special figure 1 determination process is finished, and the process is returned to the special symbol standby process.

When the microcomputer 101 for game control determines that it is not a small hit in step S1630, it selects a special figure 1 losing design type determination table in step S1633, and performs special figure 1 losing design type determination in step S1634.

The game control microcomputer 101 reads out the first stored symbol type random number stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a in the special figure 1 losing symbol type determination, and determines the special figure 1 losing symbol type. The type determination table is collated to determine which of the lost symbol types it is. When the game control microcomputer 101 performs the special figure 1 losing symbol type determination, in step S1635, the symbol type flag indicating the losing symbol type that is the determination result is set in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and in step S1636, A symbol specifying command indicating the lost symbol type, which is the determination result, is set in an output buffer provided in the game RAM 104, the special symbol 1 determination process is finished, and the process is returned to the special symbol standby process.

Next, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing will be described. FIG. 56 shows a flowchart of special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing. As shown in FIG. 56, the game control microcomputer 101, in the special figure 1 pattern determination process, first, as a step S1641, whether the game state related to the ease of opening the second start port 12 is currently a non-time saving state. determine whether or not When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is a non-time saving state, in step S1642, while selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state, it is determined that it is not a non-time saving state, that is, it is a time saving state Then, in step S1643, select the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the time saving state, and proceed to step S1644.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 checks the symbol type flag and the like in step S1644, and determines whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot determination result is a jackpot. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure 1 jackpot determination result is a jackpot, in step S1645, in the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1642 or step S1643, for the jackpot Select the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table. On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure 1 big hit determination result is not a big hit, in step S1645, it checks the symbol type flag etc., and determines whether the special figure 1 big hit determination result is a small hit. judge. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure 1 big hit determination result is a small hit, in step S1647, in the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1642 or step S1643, the small hit Select the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for and proceed to step S1656.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure 1 big hit determination result is not a small hit, in step S1648, the symbol type flag or the like is checked, and the result of the special figure 1 losing symbol type determination is the losing symbol A. Determine whether or not When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the result of the special figure 1 losing design type determination is the losing design A, it performs reach determination in step S1649. The game control microcomputer 101 reads out the first stored reach random number among the reach random numbers stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a in the reach determination, and uses the reach random number as the current game state (non-time saving It is determined whether there is reach or not by referring to the reach determination table corresponding to the state/time saving state).

The game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the result of the reach determination is "with reach" in step S1650. The game control microcomputer 101, if the result of the reach determination is reach, in step S1651, in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table selected in either step S1642 or step S1643, to reach loss pattern A with reach After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table concerned, proceed to step S1656, if the result of reach determination is not reachable, in step S1652, check the current special figure 1 pending number, step S1642 or step S1643 After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for reach no loss pattern A according to the special figure 1 reservation number in the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in any of the above, the process proceeds to step S1656.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1648 that the result of the special figure 1 losing design type determination is not the losing design A, in step S1653, the symbol type flag etc. are checked, and the special figure 1 losing design type determination is performed. It is determined whether or not the result of is a lost symbol B. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the result of the special figure 1 losing pattern type determination is the losing pattern B, in step S1654, in the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1642 or step S1643 Then, after selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the losing design B, proceeding to step S1656, and determining that the result of the special figure 1 losing design type determination is not the losing design B, in step S1655, the losing design C After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for, the process proceeds to step S1656.

When the game control microcomputer 101 selects the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table in steps S1645, S1647, S1651, S1652, S1654, and S1655, in step S1656, special figure 1 based on the selected special figure 1 variation pattern determination table Perform fluctuation pattern judgment. The game control microcomputer 101, in the special figure 1 variation pattern determination, reads out the one stored first among the special figure variation pattern random numbers stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a, and the special figure variation The special figure 1 variation pattern is determined by collating with the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table in which the pattern random number is selected.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special figure 1 variation start command indicating the determined special figure 1 variation pattern in step S1657 to the output buffer, and in step S1658, the determined special figure 1 variation pattern The corresponding special figure fluctuation time is set in the timer for special operation, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination processing is terminated, and the processing is returned to the special symbol standby processing.

Next, special figure 2 decision processing and special figure 2 fluctuation pattern decision processing in special design standby processing are explained. First, the special figure 2 determination processing will be described. FIG. 57 shows a flowchart of special figure 2 determination processing. As shown in FIG. 57, the game control microcomputer 101, in the special figure 2 determination process, first, as step S1661, determines whether or not the current game state related to the jackpot probability is the normal probability state. When determining that the game control microcomputer 101 is in the normal probability state, in step S1662, while selecting the special figure 2 jackpot determination table for the normal probability state, it is determined that it is not in the normal probability state, that is, in the high probability state Then, in step S1663, the special figure 2 jackpot determination table for the high probability state is selected.

When the special figure 2 big hit determination table is selected, the game control microcomputer 101 performs special figure 2 big hit determination based on the selected special figure 2 big hit determination table in step S1664. In the special figure 2 jackpot determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the first stored special symbol random number stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b, and selects the special figure 2 jackpot determination. The table is collated to determine whether it is a big hit or a loss.

The game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 jackpot determination is a jackpot in step S1665. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is a jackpot, it selects a special figure 2 jackpot symbol type determination table in step S1666, and performs special figure 2 jackpot symbol type determination in step S1667.

The game control microcomputer 101 reads out the first stored symbol type random number stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b in the special figure 2 jackpot pattern type determination, and determines the special figure 2 jackpot pattern. The type determination table is collated to determine which jackpot symbol type it is. When the special figure 2 jackpot pattern type determination is performed, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a pattern type flag indicating the jackpot pattern type that is the determination result in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104 in step S1668, and in step S1669, The symbol specifying command indicating the jackpot symbol type as the determination result is set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104, the special symbol 2 determination process is finished, and the process is returned to the special symbol standby process.

The game control microcomputer 101 is not a big hit in step S1665, that is, when it is determined that it is a loss, in step S1670, it selects the special figure 2 losing symbol type determination table, and in step S1671, determines the special figure 2 losing symbol type. conduct.

The game control microcomputer 101 reads out the first stored symbol type random number stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b in the special figure 2 loss symbol type determination, and determines the special figure 2 loss symbol type. The type determination table is collated to determine which of the lost symbol types it is. When the game control microcomputer 101 performs the special figure 2 losing symbol type determination, in step S1672, the symbol type flag indicating the losing symbol type that is the determination result is set in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and in step S1673, Set the symbol designation command indicating the lost symbol type, which is the determination result, to the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104, finish the special figure 2 determination process, and return the process to the special symbol standby process. It should be noted that, as described above, in the first embodiment, only one type of the missing symbol D is provided as the missing symbol type related to the special figure 2 .

Next, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing will be described. FIG. 58 shows a flowchart of special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing. As shown in FIG. 58, the game control microcomputer 101, in the special figure 2 pattern determination process, first, as a step S1681, whether the game state related to the ease of opening the second start port 12 is currently a non-time saving state determine whether or not When it determines with the microcomputer 101 for game control being non-time saving state, in step S1682, it will select the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for non-time-saving state, and will progress to step S1689.

The game control microcomputer 101, in step S1681, when it is determined that it is not a non-time saving state, ie, a time saving state, in step S1683, the type of the time saving flag to be described later is confirmed, and the time saving state is time saving after the jackpot game. state. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the time saving state is the time saving state after the jackpot game, in step S1684, selects the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the first time saving state, and proceeds to step S1689.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1683 that it is not the time saving state after the jackpot game state, in step S1685, the type of the time saving flag is checked, and the time saving state is the time saving state after the small winning symbol stop display. It is determined whether or not. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the time saving state is the time saving state after the small hit symbol stop display, in step S1686, selects the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the second time saving state, and step S1689 proceed to

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the time saving state is not the time saving state after the small hit symbol stop display, in step S1687, the type of the time saving flag is confirmed, and the time saving state is after the losing symbol B stop display. It is determined whether or not it is in the time saving state. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the time saving state is the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern B, in step S1686, selects the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the second time saving state, step While proceeding to S1689, if it is determined that it is not the time saving state after the stop display of the missing symbol B, in step S1688, select the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the third time saving state, and proceed to step S1689.

In step S1689, the game control microcomputer 101 checks the symbol type flag and the like, and determines whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot determination result is a jackpot. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure 2 jackpot determination result is a jackpot, in step S1690, in the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table selected in any of steps S1682, S1684, S1686, and S1688, Select the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the big hit. On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure 2 jackpot determination result is not a jackpot, that is, it is a loss, it performs reach determination in step S1691. The game control microcomputer 101 reads out the first stored reach random number among the reach random numbers stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b in the reach determination, and uses the reach random number as the current game state (non-time saving It is determined whether there is reach or not by referring to the reach determination table corresponding to the state/time saving state).

The game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the result of reach determination is "with reach" in step S1692. game control microcomputer 101, if the result of the reach determination is reach, in step S1693, step S1682, S1684, S1686, in the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1688, reach presence loss After selecting the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for, proceed to step S1695, if the result of reach determination is not reachable, in step S1694, check the current special figure 2 pending number, steps S1682, S1684 , S1686, after selecting the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for reach without loss according to the special figure 2 reservation number in the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table selected in either S1688, proceed to step S1695.

When the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is selected in steps S1690, S1693, and S1694, the game control microcomputer 101 performs special figure 2 variation pattern determination based on the selected special figure 2 variation pattern determination table in step S1695. . The game control microcomputer 101 reads out the first stored special figure variation pattern random number stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b in the special figure 2 variation pattern determination, and the special figure variation The special figure 2 variation pattern is determined by collating with the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table in which the pattern random number is selected.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special figure 2 variation start command indicating the special figure 2 variation pattern determined in step S1696 to the output buffer, and in step S1697, the determined special figure 2 variation pattern The corresponding special figure fluctuation time is set in the special operation timer, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination processing is terminated, and the processing is returned to the special symbol standby processing.

Next, the special symbol determination process will be described. FIG. 59 shows a flowchart of the special symbol determination process. As shown in FIG. 59, in the special symbol determination process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to terminate the stop display of the special symbol to determine the special symbol in step S1703. It is determined whether or not the special figure fixed time set in the operation timer has elapsed. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special symbol confirmation time has not passed, it ends the special symbol confirmation process. On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure confirmation time has elapsed, it determines whether or not it is currently in the normal probability state (high probability flag is OFF) in step S1752.

If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is not currently in the normal probability state, it proceeds to step S1757, and if it is determined that it is currently in the normal probability state, in step S1753, whether it is a time saving state (time saving flag is ON). determine whether If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is not in the time saving state, it proceeds to step S1757, and if it determines that it is currently in the time saving state, in step S1754, "1" is subtracted from the value of the time saving remaining number counter, and in step S1755 , determines whether or not the value of the time saving remaining number counter is "0". When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the value of the time saving remaining number counter (time saving remaining number of times) is not "0", it proceeds to step S1757, and the value of the time saving remaining number counter (time saving remaining number of times) is "0". If it determines with it, in step S1756, it will be made to transfer from a time saving state to a non-working time saving state (turning off a time saving flag), and will progress to step S1757.

The game control microcomputer 101 confirms the current game state in step S1757, sets the game state command indicating the game state in the output buffer, and in step S1758, the special symbol that is currently stopped and displayed is the jackpot symbol. It is determined whether or not. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is a jackpot symbol, it resets the game state in step S1759 (sets the normal game state. Specifically, the high probability flag and the time saving flag are turned OFF, and the time saving remaining number of times set the value of the counter to "0").

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game preparation process in step S1760, changes the special action status to "4" in step S1761, and ends the special symbol determination process. The game control microcomputer 101 sets a jackpot game control table corresponding to the jackpot symbol type in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104 in the jackpot game preparation process. In addition, a jackpot opening flag indicating that the opening corresponding to the stopped jackpot pattern is in progress is turned on in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and a predetermined opening time (jackpot game starts) is set according to the type of the jackpot pattern. set the time from when the player is played until the start of one round) to the special action timer. Furthermore, according to the type of the jackpot pattern, an opening command indicating the type of the jackpot pattern is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 . The opening command corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol indicates that the jackpot game (opening of the jackpot game) corresponding to the type of the stop-displayed jackpot symbol is started.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1758 that the currently stopped and displayed special symbol is not a big hit symbol, in step S1762 it determines whether or not the currently stopped and displayed special symbol is a small winning symbol. judge. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is a small winning symbol, in step S1763, it changes the special operation status to "6" and terminates the special symbol confirmation process.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1762 that the currently stopped and displayed special symbol is not a small hit symbol, in step S1764, the currently stopped and displayed special symbol is the losing symbol B or the losing symbol C. Determine whether or not there is When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is the losing symbol B or the losing symbol C, in step S1766, it changes the special operation status to "8" and terminates the special symbol determination process, while the losing symbol B or When it is determined that it is not the lost symbol C, in step S1765, the special action status is changed to "1", and the special symbol determination process is terminated.

Here, the game state setting processing (S1507) after displaying the small winning symbols and the game state setting processing (S1509) after displaying the losing symbols will be described. First, the game state setting processing (S1507) after displaying the small winning symbols will be described. As described above, the game control microcomputer 101 performs the game state setting process after the small winning symbol display when the special action status is "6". Since the game control microcomputer 101 performs the game in the time-saving state after the small-hit symbols are stopped and displayed, the game state setting processing after the small-hit symbols are displayed indicates that the time-saving state is triggered by the stop display of the small-hit symbols. A time saving flag (time saving flag after displaying a small winning symbol) is turned ON in a time saving flag area of the game RAM 104 to set a time saving state, and a game state indicating that it is a time saving state triggered by the stop display of the small winning symbol. A command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 . In addition, since the end condition of the time saving state is the number of execution times "150" times of the special figure variable display, "150" times is set to the time saving remaining number counter as the time saving prescribed number of times. Then, the game control microcomputer 101 changes the special action status to "7", and ends the game state setting process after displaying the small winning symbol.

Next, the game state setting processing (S1509) after displaying the losing symbols will be described. As described above, the game control microcomputer 101 performs the game state setting process after displaying the losing symbols when the special action status is "8". The game control microcomputer 101 sets the time saving state based on the losing symbol type in the game state setting process after the losing symbol display. Specifically, if the stop display of the losing pattern B is performed, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a time saving flag (a time saving flag after displaying the losing pattern B) indicating a time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing pattern B. flag) is turned on in the time saving flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the time saving state, and a game state command indicating the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing pattern B is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104. do. In addition, since the end condition of the time saving state is the number of execution times "150" times of the special figure variable display, "150" times is set to the time saving remaining number counter as the time saving prescribed number of times. On the other hand, if the stop display of the losing pattern C is performed, the game control microcomputer 101 has a time saving flag (time saving flag after displaying the losing pattern C) indicating a time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing pattern C. is turned on in the time saving flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the time saving state, and a game state command indicating the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing pattern C is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104.例文帳に追加In addition, since the end condition of the time saving state is the execution number of times "50" times of the special figure variable display, "50" times is set to the time saving remaining number counter as the time saving prescribed number of times. Then, the game control microcomputer 101 changes the special action status to "1", and ends the game state setting process after displaying the lost symbols.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101, when setting the time saving state in the game state setting process after the jackpot game (S1505), the time saving flag (jackpot game state A time-saving flag) is turned on in the time-saving flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the time-saving state, and a game state command indicating the time-saving state triggered by the end of the jackpot game state is sent to the output buffer of the game RAM 104. set. Also, if the expected number of times of working hours as an end condition is set in the time saving state, that is, when setting the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state related to the jackpot symbols C and F, the ending conditions of the time saving state are special. Since the number of execution times of the figure variable display is "100" times, "100" times is set to the time saving remaining number counter as the prescribed number of time saving.

Thus, in the game state setting process after the jackpot game (S1505), the game state setting process after the small winning design display (S1507), and the game state setting process after the losing design display (S1509), as the time saving flag indicating the time saving state, Since the time saving flag after the big hit game state, the time saving flag after the small winning design display, the time saving flag after the losing design B displaying, and the time saving flag after the losing design C displaying are set, the game control microcomputer 101 is based on the time saving flag. , It is possible to identify the time saving state associated with the opportunity, appropriately select the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table related to the time saving state, and perform the special figure 2 variation pattern determination.

Next, the production when the production control microcomputer 121 sets the time saving state by each opportunity will be described. First, the effect in the time-saving state triggered by the end of the jackpot game state will be described. FIG. 60 is a diagram mainly showing a display section 50a showing a situation in which an effect in the time saving mode is being performed in the time saving state triggered by the end of the jackpot game state. FIG. 60(A) is a diagram showing a state in which an ending effect is executed when a jackpot game ends as an effect before the effect in the time saving mode is performed, and FIG. 60(B) shows that the ending effect is completed Figure 60 (C) to Figure 60 (E) shows the situation just before the special figure fluctuation production is started in the time saving mode and the special figure fluctuation production is performed by the production mode B. It is a diagram.

As described above, the production control microcomputer 121 sets the time reduction production mode when the jackpot game state ends, and outputs the time reduction production mode start command indicating to start the time reduction production mode to the output buffer of the production RAM 124. set. The set time saving mode start command is transmitted to the image control board 140 by command transmission processing (S4004).

When receiving the time saving mode start command, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 switches from the ending background image G202 to the time saving background image G130 as shown in FIGS. In addition, the image CPU 141 is controlled in the time saving state from now on, and in the time saving state, the game is performed to perform the special figure 2 variable display by basically winning the second start port 12, so in the predetermined area of the display unit 50a, An image (right-handed image) G30 is displayed to prompt the right-handed player. Further, the image CPU 141 displays an image (remaining number of times of time saving) G31 indicating the number of remaining times of time saving related to the time saving state in a predetermined area of the display unit 50a.

In addition, the specific display contents of the right hitting image G30 and the time saving remaining number of times image G31 are not particularly limited within the range in which the functions can be exhibited. Consists of a belt-shaped base portion extending in all directions and a figure representing a plurality of rightward arrows arranged horizontally on the base portion, and the remaining time reduction image G31 is composed of the characters “Remaining number of times XX times”. consists of A number representing the actual remaining number of times of time saving is displayed in the part of “〇〇” related to the number of times of saving time remaining image G31. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60(B), before the ending production ends and the special figure fluctuation production in the time saving mode is started, the time saving specified number of times related to the time saving state after the jackpot game state is "100". is displayed. In addition, the image CPU 141 displays the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 related to the jackpot game in a stopped state before the ending effect ends and the special figure variation effect in the time saving mode is started.

Then, when the first special figure fluctuation display is started in the time saving production mode, as shown in FIG. The number of remaining time reduction is reduced by "1". Then, when the first special figure variation display ends, as shown in FIG. 60(D), stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed. Subsequently, when the second special figure fluctuation display is started in the time saving production mode, as shown in FIG. The remaining number of times of shortening time indicated is further reduced by "1". After that, unless the jackpot is won, while the special figure fluctuation performance based on the special figure fluctuation pattern is appropriately executed in the time saving production mode, each time the special figure fluctuation display is started, the time saving shown by the remaining number of times of working hours image G31. The remaining number of times decreases by "1".

Next, description will be made on performances performed in the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the small winning pattern, the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing pattern B, and the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing pattern C.

In the first embodiment, in the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the small winning pattern and the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing pattern B, the production mode corresponding to the time saving state is different from the time saving production mode. set. Hereinafter, this production mode will be referred to as a "super chance mode". Then, in the super chance mode, as in the case of the time saving production mode, the background image dedicated to the super chance mode (super chance mode background image G140) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and the BGM for the super chance mode is displayed from the speaker 52. (BGM for Super Chance Mode) is output. In the first embodiment, the super chance mode background image G140 is composed of a moving image that introduces the scenery of the golf course.

For example, the production control microcomputer 121 receives a game state command indicating a time saving state triggered by the stop display of the small winning symbol and a game state command indicating a time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol B, step After setting a new game state in the game state setting process of S4310, a production mode flag (super chance mode flag) indicating the super chance mode is turned ON in a predetermined area of the production RAM 124, and the super chance mode is started. The super chance mode start command shown is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for effect. The set super chance mode start command is transmitted to the image control board 140 by command transmission processing (S4004).

When the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives the super chance mode start command, the background image displayed immediately before on the display unit 50a is switched to the super chance mode background image G140. In addition, the image CPU 141 is controlled in the time saving state from now on, and in the time saving state, the game is performed to perform the special figure 2 variable display by basically winning the second start port 12. Therefore, in the predetermined area of the display unit 50a, A right hitting image G30 is displayed. Further, the image CPU 141 displays a remaining time saving frequency image G31 representing the remaining time saving frequency related to the time saving state in a predetermined area of the display unit 50a.

On the other hand, in the time-saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing pattern C, the performance mode corresponding to the time-saving state is set unlike the time-saving performance mode and the super-chance mode. Below, this production mode is called a "short chance mode". Then, in the short chance mode, as in the case of the time saving production mode and the super chance mode, the background image dedicated to the short chance mode (short chance mode background image G150) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and the short chance mode is displayed from the speaker 52. BGM for the mode (BGM for short chance mode) is output. In the first embodiment, the short chance mode background image G150 is composed of a moving image showing a predetermined character jogging.

For example, the production control microcomputer 121 receives a game state command indicating a time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing pattern C, after setting a new game state in the game state setting process of step S4310, the short chance mode A performance mode flag (short chance mode flag) indicating is turned on in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, and a short chance mode start command indicating the start of the short chance mode is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. - 特許庁The set short chance mode start command is transmitted to the image control board 140 by command transmission processing (S4004).

When receiving the short chance mode start command, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 switches the background image displayed immediately before on the display unit 50a to the short chance mode background image G150. In addition, the image CPU 141 is controlled in the time saving state from now on, and in the time saving state, the game is performed to perform the special figure 2 variable display by basically winning the second start port 12, so in the predetermined area of the display unit 50a, A right hitting image G30 is displayed. Further, the image CPU 141 displays a remaining time saving frequency image G31 representing the remaining time saving frequency related to the time saving state in a predetermined area of the display unit 50a.

In addition, although detailed description is omitted, in the first embodiment, special figure variation production related to small hit, special figure variation production related to loss of losing pattern type B, and special figure variation related to loss of losing pattern type C In production, after reach is established, production dedicated to these special figure fluctuation production is executed. Hereinafter, this dedicated effect is referred to as "challenge effect".

In the challenge effect, a background image dedicated to the challenge effect (challenge effect background image) G116 is displayed as a background image on the display section 50a. That is, when reach is established, any of the normal background images (the first normal background image G111, the second normal background image G112, the third normal background image G113, the ) to the challenge effect background image G116.

Next, specific examples of the super chance mode and the short chance mode will be described. FIG. 61 is a diagram mainly showing a state in which the display section 50a switches from the normal production mode to the super chance mode, and the production in the super chance mode is performed. On the other hand, FIG. 61 is a diagram mainly showing how the display section 50a switches from the normal production mode to the short chance mode, and shows the production in the short chance mode.

First, the super chance mode will be explained. FIG. 61(A) is a diagram showing how the challenge effect is performed on the display unit 50a in the normal effect mode, and FIG. FIG. 61(C) is a diagram showing how the stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is executed in a manner suggesting that the winning and losing symbols B are lost and that the super-chance mode is set. , A diagram showing the state immediately before the normal production mode ends and the special figure fluctuation production by the super chance mode is started, FIG. 61 (D) to FIG. It is a figure which shows a mode that it is divided.

As shown in FIG. 61(A), when the challenge production is executed in the special figure fluctuation production, when the special figure fluctuation display related to the small hit and the losing pattern B ends, as shown in FIG. 61(B) , a small hit, and a loss of the losing symbol B, and the stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed in a manner suggesting that the super-chance mode is set. In the first embodiment, the left production pattern EZ1 is the character " Super chance" (left super chance mode suggestive image) G32a, middle production pattern EZ2 contains the characters "mode" (medium super chance mode suggestive image) G32b, right production pattern EZ3 contains the characters "rush" ( Right super-chance mode suggestive image) G32c.

In the following description, the left super-chance mode suggestive image G32a, the middle super-chance mode suggestive image G32b, and the right super-chance mode suggestive image G32c are collectively referred to as "super-chance mode suggestive image G32". The display of the super chance mode suggestion image G32 suggests that the super chance mode is set.

As described above, immediately after the special symbol confirmation process is completed, the game state command indicating the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the small winning symbol, or the game state indicating the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol B Since the command is transmitted to the production control board 120, the super chance mode is set according to the elapse of the special figure determination time after the stop display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, and the super chance mode start command. is sent to the image control board 140 . Therefore, at this timing, as shown in FIG. 61(C), the background image for challenge effect G116 is switched to the background image for super chance mode G140. In addition, from now on, it is controlled in the time saving state, and in the time saving state, basically the second start port 12 is made to win and the special figure 2 variable display is performed. Is displayed. Furthermore, in a predetermined area of the display unit 50a, a remaining number of times of shortening of working hours image G31 related to the shortening of working hours state is displayed. In addition, in the first embodiment, the prescribed number of times of the time saving state associated with the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the small winning pattern and the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing pattern B is "150" times, so super chance Immediately after setting the mode, as shown in FIG. 61(C), when the remaining time saving frequency image G31 is displayed, the remaining time saving frequency image G31 suggests that the remaining time saving frequency is "150" times.

Subsequently, when the first special figure variable display is started in the super chance mode, as shown in FIG. The remaining number of times of reduced time indicated is reduced by "1". Then, when the first special figure variation display ends, as shown in FIG. 61(E), stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed. Subsequently, when the second special figure variable display is started in the super chance mode, as shown in FIG. The remaining number of times of shortening time indicated is further reduced by "1". After that, unless the jackpot is won, while the special figure variation performance based on the special figure variation pattern is appropriately executed in the super chance mode, each time the special figure variation display is started, the time shortening shown by the remaining number of times image G31. The remaining number of times decreases by "1".

Next, the short chance mode will be explained. FIG. 62(A) is a diagram showing how a challenge effect is performed on the display unit 50a in the normal effect mode, and FIG. A diagram showing that the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner suggesting that the symbol C is lost and that the short chance mode is set, FIG. 62(D) to 62(F) show the situation just before the end of the special figure fluctuation production by the short chance mode is started, and the appearance that the special figure fluctuation production by the short chance mode is being performed It is a figure which shows.

As shown in FIG. 62(A), while the challenge effect is being executed in the special figure variation effect, when the special figure variation display related to the losing design C ends, as shown in FIG. 62(B), the losing design The performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stop-displayed in a manner suggesting that C is lost and that the short chance mode is set. In the first embodiment, the left production pattern EZ1 has the characters "short chance" as "an aspect suggesting that the losing pattern C is lost and that the short chance mode is set" related to the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3. An image including (left short chance mode suggestive image) G33a, an image (medium and short chance mode suggestive image) G33b in which the middle effect symbol EZ2 includes the characters "mode", and an image in which the right effect symbol EZ3 includes the characters "rush" (right short chance mode suggestion image) G33c.

In the following description, the left short chance mode suggestive image G33a, the medium short chance mode suggestive image G33b, and the right short chance mode suggestive image G33c are collectively referred to as "short chance mode suggestive image G33". The display of the short chance mode suggestion image G33 suggests that the short chance mode is set.

As described above, immediately after the special symbol determination process is completed, since the game state command indicating the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol C is transmitted to the effect control board 120, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped. A short chance mode is set and a short chance mode start command is transmitted to the image control board 140 according to the elapse of the special figure determination time after the display is performed. Therefore, at this timing, as shown in FIG. 62(C), the background image for challenge effect G116 is switched to the background image for short chance mode G150. In addition, from now on, it is controlled in the time saving state, and in the time saving state, basically the second start port 12 is made to win and the special figure 2 variable display is performed. Is displayed. Furthermore, in a predetermined area of the display unit 50a, a remaining time saving number image G31 related to the time saving state is displayed. In addition, in the first embodiment, since the prescribed number of time reductions related to the time reduction state triggered by the stop display of the losing pattern C is "50" times, immediately after setting the short chance mode, as shown in FIG. 62(C) When the time saving remaining frequency image G31 is displayed, the time saving remaining frequency image G31 suggests that the time saving remaining frequency is "50" times.

Subsequently, when the first special figure variable display is started in the short chance mode, as shown in FIG. The remaining number of times of reduced time indicated is reduced by "1". Then, when the first special figure variation display ends, as shown in FIG. 62(E), stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed. Subsequently, when the second special figure variable display is started in the short chance mode, as shown in FIG. The remaining number of times of shortening time indicated is further reduced by "1". After that, unless the jackpot is won, while the special figure fluctuation performance based on the special figure fluctuation pattern is appropriately executed in the short chance mode, every time the special figure fluctuation display is started, the time saving shown by the remaining number of times of time reduction image G31 The remaining number of times decreases by "1".

Next, a characteristic game flow of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a characteristic game flow of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to the first embodiment. When the game is being played in the normal game state, in other words, when the effects of the first normal effect stage, the second normal effect stage, and the third normal effect stage are executed in the normal effect mode, When the stop display of the small winning pattern or the stop display of the losing pattern B is performed, the time saving prescribed number of times is 150 times according to the stop display, and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the second time saving state is used. A time-saving state is set to shift to a low-probability high-base game state and shift to a super-chance mode. On the other hand, when the stop display of the losing pattern C is performed, the time saving prescribed number of times is 50 times according to the stop display, and the time saving state using the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the third time saving state is set. It shifts to a low probability high base game state and shifts to a short chance mode.

Also, when the game is played in the normal game state, in other words, when the effects of the first normal effect stage, the second normal effect stage, and the third normal effect stage are executed in the normal effect mode. Then, when the stop display of the big win symbol C is performed, it shifts to the big win game state and the big win performance mode according to the stop display. Then, according to the end of the jackpot game state based on the stop display of the jackpot pattern C, the time saving prescribed number of times is 100 times, and the time saving state using the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the first time saving state is set and low. While shifting to a high-probability base game state, it shifts to a time-saving performance mode. Incidentally, when the stop display of the big win symbols A and B is performed, according to the stop display, the game state shifts to the big win game state and also shifts to the big win performance mode. Then, according to the end of the jackpot game state based on the stop display of the jackpot patterns A and B, the time saving state using the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the first time saving state is set, and the shift to the high probability high base game state At the same time, it shifts to the variable probability production mode.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment, the time saving state may occur without executing a jackpot game. Therefore, a positive surprise can be given to the player, and the amusement of the game is improved. In addition, when a losing pattern or a small winning pattern different from the big winning pattern that generates a big winning game is stopped and displayed, the time is shortened, so that the player is made to have expectations for the stop display of the losing pattern or the small winning pattern. can improve the amusement interest

In addition, if it is determined to be a losing pattern type B or C in the losing pattern type determination before the special figure fluctuation display is performed, that is, it is determined whether or not the time saving state can be made. Then, the losing symbols B and C are stopped and displayed, so that the player is provided with an opportunity to become advantageous in addition to the winning of the jackpot. Therefore, the game becomes deeper and the interest in the game is improved. In addition to the stop display of the losing symbols B and C and the stop display of the small winning symbols, the time saving state may occur after the big winning game is executed. Thus, by providing a plurality of routes to the time-saving state, the game is moderately complicated and the game interest is improved.

In addition, according to the pachinko game machine PY1, when a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it may become a time saving state, and when it is in the time saving state and when it is in the normal game state (non-time saving state) Since the conditions for determining the 2 variation pattern are different, specifically, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is different, the game flow related to the pachinko game machine PY1 can be appropriately complicated, and the game interest is improved. . Furthermore, as special symbols different from the jackpot symbols that can be put into a time-saving state, there are a losing symbol B, a losing symbol C, and a small winning symbol, and the stopping display of the losing symbol B and the stopping display of the small winning symbol were performed. The conditions for determining the special figure 2 variation pattern in the time saving state are different, specifically, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is different, so The game flow related to the pachinko game machine PY1 is moderately complicated, and the monotony and boredom in the time-saving state can be prevented, thereby improving the game amusement.

(Modified example of the first embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the special figure 1 losing pattern types that generate the time saving state are two types of losing patterns B and C, but may be three or more types. In this case, as in the first embodiment, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used in the time saving state may be changed according to the lost design type. In addition, in the first embodiment, the special figure 2 losing pattern type is provided only with a losing pattern that does not generate a time saving state, but like the special figure 1 losing pattern type, a losing pattern type that generates a time saving state is provided. can be In this case, in the time saving state, the same special figure 2 variation pattern determination table as any special figure 1 losing pattern type that generates the time saving state may be used, and the special figure 1 losing pattern type that generates the time saving state Different Toku-zu 2 variation pattern determination table may be used.

Also, in the first embodiment, the special figure 2 big hit determination table does not include a small hit, but a small hit may be included so that a small hit can be won even in the special figure 2 big hit determination. In this case, the time-saving state may be set with the termination of the stop display of the small winning symbols as a trigger. Furthermore, in the time saving state in this case, the same special figure 2 variation pattern determination table as after the stop display of the small winning pattern according to special figure 1 may be used, and a different special figure 2 variation pattern determination table may be used. .

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the small winning symbols are not provided with a plurality of types like the losing symbols, but may be provided with a plurality of types like the losing symbols. In this case, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used in the time saving state may be changed according to the type of the small hit symbol. Further, in the first embodiment, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the time saving state always occurs after the stop display, but the time saving state may not occur in some cases. That is, the small winning pattern may have a type of a small winning pattern that generates a time saving state and a type of a small winning pattern that does not generate a time saving state. Alternatively, only a small winning pattern that does not cause the time saving state may be provided.

In addition, in the first embodiment, both the stop display of the small winning symbols and the stop display of the losing symbols can be in the time saving state, but as a trigger other than the end of the big winning gaming state, only one of the symbols is stopped. It may be provided. Furthermore, the time saving state is not generated by the fact that the small winning pattern is derived as the big winning determination result by the big winning determination or the losing patterns B and C are derived as the losing pattern type determination result by the losing pattern type determination, For example, it may be determined whether or not to generate the time saving state before the jackpot determination (time saving determination). In this case, for example, a random number (time-saving random number) such as a jackpot random number is provided separately, and the judgment value of the time-saving random number is to generate a time-saving state and not to generate a time-saving state like a jackpot judgment. You may make it perform the time saving determination which collates with the time saving determination table distributed suitably. Then, when it is determined in the time saving determination that the time saving state is generated, the time saving state may be set after the stop display of the small winning pattern or the stop display of the losing pattern. Also, in this case, if the determination result that the time saving state is generated in the time saving determination is derived, and if the determination result that the time saving state is not generated is derived in the time saving determination, the small hit pattern or the losing pattern You can make it different. Furthermore, when the judgment result that the time saving state is generated is derived by the time saving judgment, the type of the small winning pattern or the losing pattern is determined from a plurality of types, and the big winning according to the first embodiment Like pattern type determination and loss pattern type determination, even if the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table used in the time saving state and the time saving prescribed number of times (end condition) are different good.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the same special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is used in the time saving state after the stop display of the small hit pattern and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern B, but different Special Figure 2 variation pattern determination table may be used. In addition, although the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning pattern and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern B are shifted to the same performance mode, they may be shifted to different performance modes.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern B and the time saving state after the stopping display of the losing pattern C shift to different production modes, but they shift to the same production mode. You can do it.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the time saving specified number of the same number of times is set in the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning pattern and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern B, but different times The prescribed number of working hours may be set. In addition, in the first embodiment, different times of the prescribed times of time saving are set for the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern B and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern C, but the same number of times is set. The prescribed number of working hours may be set. Furthermore, the same number of time reduction prescribed times may be set in the time reduction state of all opportunities related to the low probability high base gaming state.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment and the first embodiment according to the present invention described above. In 2nd Embodiment, it is common in 1st Embodiment in that a time saving state may be set ignited by the stop display of a small winning design, and the stop display of a losing design. In the following, as the second embodiment, mainly the basic embodiment and the points different from the first embodiment will be described. Also, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the basic embodiment and the same configuration as the first embodiment, or for the configuration similarly corresponding to that of the first embodiment.

In the first embodiment, when the jackpot game ends, the stop display of the small winning pattern/losing pattern B, and the stop display of the losing pattern C are triggered, the game state related to the ease of opening the second start port 12 is set to 1 in common. One time-saving state was set. However, in 2nd Embodiment, the time saving state from which the opening easiness of the 2nd starting port 12 (the easiness of opening the 2nd starting port 12) differs is set according to the opportunity of a time saving state. In the following, the time saving state set with the end of the jackpot game is referred to as the “first time saving state”, and the time saving state set with the stop display of the small winning pattern/losing pattern B is referred to as the “second time saving state”. And the time saving state set with the stop display of the losing pattern C as a trigger is called a "third time saving state".

As described in the basic embodiment, the second start port 12 is opened as a configuration that affects the ease of opening the second start port 12 (ease of opening the second start port 12) in the time saving state. There is a winning probability (per winning probability), a normal pattern fluctuation time, and an opening time of the second start port 12 in the auxiliary game. Then, the hit determination to determine whether or not hit is performed using the hit determination table, the normal pattern variation pattern determination to determine the normal pattern variation time is performed using the normal pattern variation pattern determination table, the second start port The auxiliary game opened by 12 is performed using the auxiliary game control table. Here, in the basic embodiment (first embodiment), the ease of opening the second start port 12 is associated with any table, and the table used in the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state Although it was separately provided with the table used when , in the second embodiment, according to the fact that there are multiple types of time saving state, the table used in the non-time saving state and the first time saving It is divided into a table used in the state, a table used in the second time saving state, and a table used in the third time saving state.

Figure 64 (A) shows a configuration example of the hit determination table according to the second embodiment, Figure 64 (B) shows a configuration example of the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table according to the second embodiment, Figure 64 (C) shows a configuration example of an auxiliary game control table according to the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 64 (A), when the hit determination table for the non-time saving state is used, it is determined to be hit with a probability of 6600/65536, and when the hit determination table for the first time saving state is used is determined to be hit with a probability of 59936/65536, and when the hit determination table for the second time saving state is used, it is determined to be hit with a probability of 50000/65536, and the hit determination table for the third time saving state is If used, it is determined to be a hit with a probability of 65000/65536. Therefore, it is likely to be determined to be hit by hit determination in the order of the third time saving state>first time saving state>second time saving state>non-time saving state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), when the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table for non-time saving state is used, the normal pattern fluctuation time is determined to be 30 seconds regardless of the type of normal pattern to be stopped, When the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the first short time state is used, the normal figure fluctuation time is determined to be 5 seconds regardless of the type of normal figure to be stopped, and the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination for the second short time state When the table is used, the normal figure fluctuation time is determined to be 7 seconds regardless of the type of normal figure to stop, and when the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the third time reduction state is used, the normal figure to stop Regardless of the type of figure, the normal figure fluctuation time is determined to be 3 seconds. Therefore, in the order of the third time saving state>first time saving state>second time saving state>non-time saving state, the number of executions per unit time of the normal figure fluctuation display increases (execution frequency).

Also, as shown in FIG. 64 (C), when the auxiliary game control table for the non-time saving state is used, the opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game is 0.2 seconds, and the first time saving state When the auxiliary game control table for is used, the opening time of the second start port 12 in the auxiliary game is 5.0 seconds, and when the auxiliary game control table for the second time saving state is used, the auxiliary game When the opening time of the second starting port 12 in is 4.0 seconds and the auxiliary game control table for the third time saving state is used, the opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game is 5.6 seconds Become. Therefore, the opening time of the second starting port 12 in one auxiliary game becomes longer in the order of the third time saving state>first time saving state>second time saving state>non-time saving state.

Thus, depending on the type of time saving state, the hit determination table, the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table, and the auxiliary game control table are different, and the winning probability is the third time saving state> the first time saving state> the second time saving state High in the order of, the normal figure fluctuation time is short in the order of the 3rd time reduction state> 1st time reduction state> 2nd time reduction state, and the opening time of the 2nd start port 12 in the auxiliary game is 3rd time reduction state> 1st It is longer in the order of time saving state> second time saving state. As described above, as the winning probability increases, the easiness of opening the second starting port 12 increases, and the easiness of opening the second starting port 12 increases as the normal pattern fluctuation time decreases, and the second in the auxiliary game. The ease of opening the second starting port 12 increases as the opening time of the starting port 12 increases. Therefore, in view of this, the ease of opening the second start port 12 increases in the order of the third time saving state>first time saving state>second time saving state, and it can be said that the time saving state is advantageous to the player.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101, in order to select the hit determination table associated with the type of time saving state, the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table, and the auxiliary game control table, the first time saving state, the second time saving state, and a third time-saving state must be specified. Here, in the first embodiment, the time saving flag after the big hit game state, the time saving flag after the small winning design display, the time saving flag after the losing design B displaying, and the time saving flag after the losing design C displaying are set, after the big winning game state. The state in which the time saving flag is ON is specified as the "first time saving state", and the state in which the time saving flag after displaying the small winning pattern and the time saving flag after the losing pattern B is displayed is specified as the "second time saving state". Then, the state in which the time saving flag is turned on after the display of the losing pattern C is specified as the "third time saving state".

Therefore, the game control microcomputer 101 selects the hit determination table for the first time saving state when the time saving flag after the jackpot game state is ON when performing the hit determination in the normal symbol standby process of step S1102, and selects the hit determination table for the first time saving state. When the time-saving flag after displaying the winning pattern and the time-saving flag after displaying the losing pattern B are turned on, the hit determination table for the second time-saving state is selected, and when the time-saving flag after displaying the losing pattern C is turned on, the third time-saving flag is turned on. Select the hit table for the state. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101, in the normal symbol standby process of step S1102, when performing the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination, when the time saving flag after the jackpot game state is turned on, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination for the first time saving state A table is selected, and when the time saving flag after displaying the small winning pattern and the time saving flag after displaying the losing pattern B are ON, the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the second time saving state is selected, and the time saving flag after displaying the losing pattern C is selected. is turned on, the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the third time saving state is selected. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 performs control of the auxiliary game in the auxiliary game control process of step S1105 (opens the second starting port 12), when the time saving flag after the jackpot game state is turned on, the first An auxiliary game control table for a time saving state is selected, and when a time saving flag after displaying a small winning pattern and a time saving flag after displaying a losing pattern B are ON, an auxiliary game control table for a second time saving state is selected and a losing pattern is selected. When the time saving flag is ON after displaying C, the auxiliary game control table for the third time saving state is selected.

Also, in the second embodiment, the first time-saving state, the second time-saving state, and the third time-saving state are the time-saving state after the jackpot game state of the first embodiment, the time-saving state after the small winning design is stopped, and the time-saving after the losing design B is stopped. The state corresponds to the time saving state after the small hit symbol C is stopped. Then, the game state in which the normal probability state is set as the game state related to the jackpot winning probability and the first time saving state is set as the game state related to the ease of opening the second start port 12 is defined as the "first low probability "high base gaming state". Similarly, the normal probability state is set, and the game state in which the second time saving state is set is referred to as "second low probability high base game state", the normal probability state is set, and the third time saving state is set is referred to as a "third low-probability high-base game state".

Further, in the second embodiment, for the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table, as in the first embodiment, in the first time saving state, the special figure 2 variation pattern decision table for the first time saving state is used, In the 2 time saving state, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the 2nd time saving state is used, and in the 3rd time saving state, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the 3rd time saving state is used. Further, as for the prescribed number of time reductions related to the time reduction state, similarly to the first embodiment, the prescribed number of time reductions related to the first time reduction state after the end of the jackpot game of the jackpot symbols C and F is set to 100 times, and the second time reduction state is set to 100 times. The specified number of times of working hours reduction related to the state is set to 150 times, and the specified number of times of working hours reduction related to the third time saving state is set to 50 times. In addition, as for the performance mode related to the time saving state, the performance mode related to the first time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot symbols C and F is finished is set to the time saving mode, similarly to the first embodiment, and the second time saving state is set. The effect mode related to is set to a super chance mode, and the effect mode related to the third time saving state is set to a short chance mode.

Next, a characteristic game flow of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a characteristic game flow of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to the first embodiment. When the game is being played in the normal game state, in other words, when the effects of the first normal effect stage, the second normal effect stage, and the third normal effect stage are executed in the normal effect mode, When the stop display of the small winning pattern or the stop display of the losing pattern B is performed, the time saving prescribed number of times is 150 times according to the stop display, and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the second time saving state is used. A second time-saving state is set to shift to a second low-probability high-base game state and shift to a super-chance mode. On the other hand, when the stop display of the losing pattern C is performed, the time saving prescribed number of times is 50 times according to the stop display, and the third time saving state in which the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the third time saving state is used is set Then, it shifts to the third low probability high base game state and shifts to the short chance mode.

Also, when the game is played in the normal game state, in other words, when the effects of the first normal effect stage, the second normal effect stage, and the third normal effect stage are executed in the normal effect mode. Then, when the stop display of the big win symbol C is performed, it shifts to the big win game state and the big win performance mode according to the stop display. Then, according to the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the stop display of the jackpot pattern C, the time saving prescribed number of times is 100 times, the first time saving state in which the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the first time saving state is used is set. Then, it shifts to a low-probability high-base game state and shifts to a time-saving performance mode. It should be noted that, when the stop display of the big win symbols A and B is performed, according to the stop display, the game state shifts to the big win game state and also shifts to the big win performance mode. Then, according to the end of the jackpot game state based on the stop display of the jackpot symbols A and B, the time saving state using the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the first time saving state is set, and the shift to the high probability high base game state At the same time, it shifts to the variable probability production mode.

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 according to the second embodiment, when the losing pattern B, the losing pattern C, and the small winning pattern, which are different from the big winning pattern, are stopped and displayed, the big winning game is not executed and the time saving state is established. Then, when the stop display of the losing pattern B and the stop display of the small winning pattern are performed, and when the stopping display of the losing pattern C is performed, different types of time saving states, in detail, the constituent elements (hit Since the winning probability, normal pattern fluctuation time, opening time of the second start port 12 in the auxiliary game) will be different, the game flow related to the pachinko game machine PY1 will be moderately complicated, and the time saving state will be monotonous. Amusement in a game can be improved by preventing boredom. Furthermore, when the stop display of the losing pattern B and the stop display of the small winning pattern are performed, and when the stop display of the losing pattern C is performed, in the time saving state To determine the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern Since the conditions are different, specifically, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is different, the game related to the time saving state can be varied, and the game interest is improved.

In addition, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the second embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed and the time is reduced, special patterns (losing pattern B, losing pattern C, small winning pattern) different from the jackpot pattern are displayed. There are times when a stop display results in a time-saving state, when a jackpot game is executed, and when a special pattern (losing pattern B, losing pattern C, small winning pattern) different from the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed. , Different types of time-saving states, in detail, the constituent elements (per winning probability, normal pattern fluctuation time, opening time of the second start port 12 in the auxiliary game) are different, so the pachinko game machine PY1 The game flow is moderately complicated, and monotony and boredom in the time-saving state can be prevented, thereby improving the interest in the game. In addition, the time saving state (first time saving state) when the jackpot game is executed, and the time saving state when special patterns (losing pattern B, losing pattern C, small winning pattern) different from the jackpot pattern are stopped and displayed ( Since the easiness of opening the second starting port 12 is different between the second time saving state and the third time saving state, the time saving state can be changed to improve the game interest. Also, the first time saving state, the second time saving state, and the third time saving state have different conditions for determining the special figure 2 variation pattern, specifically the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is different, Furthermore, it is possible to add variety to the game related to the time saving state, thereby improving the interest in the game.

(Modified example of the second embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the second embodiment will be described. Game state (non-time saving state / first time saving state / second time saving state / third time saving state) related to the ease of opening the second starting port 12 (ease of opening the second starting port 12) in the second embodiment ) is not particularly limited, and can be changed as appropriate.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is set in the order of the third time saving state>first time saving state>second time saving state, but this order can be changed as appropriate. Also good. Moreover, you may make it set the opening easiness of the 2nd starting port 12 to be the same or substantially the same between some classifications of a time saving state, or between all the classifications. In this case, even if the overall ease of opening is the same or substantially the same, the elements that make up the time saving state (per winning probability / normal pattern fluctuation time / opening time of the second start port 12 in the auxiliary game) are different By doing so, it is preferable that even if the overall ease of opening is the same or substantially the same, the details of the time saving state are different, and the player's sensation of the time saving state is different. This is because the playability, especially the time saving state is diversified, and the monotony of the game can be prevented.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination is performed for each time saving state, the same normal figure fluctuation time is determined regardless of the type of normal figure that is stopped and displayed (hit / lose) , It may be determined at a different normal pattern fluctuation time according to the type of normal pattern. Furthermore, like the special figure fluctuation pattern, it is configured to be able to determine any one of a plurality of types of normal figure fluctuation times for either or either of the hits and losses, and the special figure By acquiring a random number such as a fluctuation pattern random number, the normal pattern fluctuation time may be determined by determination. Also, in the second embodiment, the stop time of the normal design is constant regardless of the game state, but like the opening time of the second start port 12 in the winning winning probability, the normal pattern fluctuation time, and the auxiliary game, You may make it differ according to a game state.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the special figure 1 losing pattern types that generate the time saving state are two types of losing patterns B and C, but may be three or more types. In this case, as in the second embodiment, the type of time saving state may be changed according to the type of lost symbol. In addition, in the second embodiment, the special figure 2 losing pattern type is provided only with a losing pattern that does not cause a time saving state, but like the special figure 1 losing pattern type, a losing pattern type that generates a time saving state is provided. can be In this case, in the time saving state, the same special figure 2 variation pattern determination table as any special figure 1 losing pattern type that generates a time saving state may be used, and a special figure 1 losing pattern type that generates a time saving state Different Toku-zu 2 variation pattern determination table may be used.

In the second embodiment, the small winning symbols are not provided with a plurality of types like the losing symbols, but may be provided with a plurality of types like the losing symbols. In this case, the type of the time saving state may be changed according to the type of the small hit symbol. Furthermore, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used according to the type of time saving state may be different.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, after the stop display of the small winning pattern and after the stop display of the losing pattern B, the second time saving state of the same type is set, but the time saving state of a different type is set. Also good. In this case, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used according to the type of time saving state may be different. In addition, although the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning pattern and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern B are shifted to the same performance mode, they may be shifted to different performance modes. In addition, in the second embodiment, the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern B and the time saving state after the stopping display of the losing pattern C shift to different production modes, but the same production mode is entered. You can do it.

In addition, instead of generating a time-saving state by deriving a small winning pattern as a big hitting determination result by a big hit determination or by deriving a losing pattern B, C as a losing pattern type determination result by a losing type determination, for example, It may be determined whether or not to generate a time-saving state before the big hit determination (time-saving determination). In this case, for example, a random number (time-saving random number) such as a jackpot random number is provided separately, and the judgment value of the time-saving random number is to generate a time-saving state and not to generate a time-saving state like a jackpot judgment. You may make it perform the time saving determination which collates with the time saving determination table distributed suitably. Then, when it is determined in the time saving determination that the time saving state is generated, the time saving state may be set after the stop display of the small winning pattern or the stop display of the losing pattern. Also, in this case, if the determination result that the time saving state is generated in the time saving determination is derived, and if the determination result that the time saving state is not generated is derived in the time saving determination, the small hit pattern or the losing pattern You can make it different. Furthermore, when the judgment result that the time saving state is generated is derived by the time saving judgment, the type of the small winning pattern or the losing pattern is determined from a plurality of types, and the big winning according to the first embodiment Like pattern type determination and loss pattern type determination, depending on the type of the small hit pattern or loss pattern, the type of time saving state (elements that make up the time saving state (per winning probability, normal pattern fluctuation pattern, second in auxiliary game 2 opening time of the starting port 12)), the special figure determination table used in the time saving state, and the time saving specified number of times (end condition) may be different.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment and the first embodiment according to the present invention described above. The third embodiment is almost the same as the first embodiment, but in the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern C, the time saving state after the small hit pattern is stopped, and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern B. The special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used in the state is used, that is, the time saving state after the stop display of the small hit design, the time saving state after the stop display of the losing design B, and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing design C It differs from the first embodiment in that the same special figure 2 variation pattern determination table common to is used. In the following, as the third embodiment, mainly the basic embodiment and the points different from the first embodiment will be described. Also, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the basic embodiment and the same configuration as the first embodiment, or for the configuration similarly corresponding to that of the first embodiment.

FIG. 66 is a special figure 2 variation used in the third embodiment in the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning design, the time saving state after the stop display of the losing design B, and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing design C. A pattern determination table is shown. In addition, this special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used in the first embodiment in the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning design and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing design B (Special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the second time saving state), but the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table common to these three time saving states is not limited to this, and the losing pattern C in the first embodiment It may be a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the 3rd time saving state) used in the time saving state after stop display. Furthermore, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table common to these three time saving states is different from the special figure 2 variation pattern decision table for the second time saving state and the special figure 2 variation pattern decision table for the third time saving state A variation pattern determination table may be used.

In addition, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used in the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning design, the time saving state after the stop display of the losing design B, and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing design C is the same. In response, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process is changed as shown in FIG. Specifically, in step S1683, when it is determined that it is not the time saving state after the jackpot gaming state, the process proceeds to step S1686 as it is, and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the second time saving state is selected.

Also, in the third embodiment, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination used in the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning pattern, the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern B, and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern C Although the table is the same, as in the case of the first embodiment, the time saving specified number of times is related to the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning pattern and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern B. is 150 times, and the specified number of times of time saving related to the time saving state after stop display of the losing pattern C is 50 times. However, the time saving specified number of times related to the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning pattern and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern B and the time saving specified number of times related to the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern C are the same. Also good.

Furthermore, as for the production mode, as in the first embodiment, the production mode related to the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning pattern and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern B is set as a super chance mode. A performance mode related to the time saving state after the stopped display of the symbol C is set as a short chance mode. However, the effect mode relating to the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning pattern and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern B and the effect mode relating to the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern C may be the same. .

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the third embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed, it becomes a time-saving state, and a special pattern different from the jackpot pattern (losing pattern B, losing pattern C, small hit When the symbol) is stopped and displayed, it becomes a time-saving state, and when the big win game is executed, the special symbols (losing symbol B, losing symbol C, small winning symbol) different from the big winning symbol are stopped and displayed. Since the conditions for determining the special figure 2 variation pattern are different in the case and specifically, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is different, the game flow related to the pachinko game machine PY1 is moderately complicated and It is possible to prevent monotony and boredom in the time-saving state, thereby improving amusement in the game. In addition, as special patterns (losing pattern B, losing pattern C, small winning pattern) different from the big winning pattern that generates the time saving state, there are a losing pattern B, a losing pattern C, and a small winning pattern, and the losing pattern B is stopped. The conditions for determining the special figure 2 variation pattern are the same in the later time saving state, the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern C, and the time saving state after the stop display of the small hit pattern, specifically the special Since the variation pattern determination table of FIG. 2 is shared, it is possible to prevent the game flow of the pachinko game machine PY1 from being excessively complicated and the interest in the game from deteriorating. In addition, the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern B, the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning pattern, and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern C are the end conditions, specifically the time saving specified number of times. Since they are different, the time-saving state can be varied, and the amusement of the game is improved.

(Modified example of the third embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the third embodiment will be described. The special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used in the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning pattern, the time saving state after the stopping display of the losing pattern B, and the time saving state after the stopping display of the losing pattern C is the same, but the losing The special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used in the time saving state after the stop display of the symbol B and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used in the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern C are the same, and this feature The FIG. 2 variation pattern determination table and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used in the time saving state after the stop display of the small hit pattern may be different. Furthermore, the prescribed number of time reductions related to the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern B and the prescribed number of time reductions related to the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern C are the same, and the prescribed number of time reductions and the small winning pattern may be different from the prescribed number of time reductions related to the time reduction state after stop display. In addition, the performance mode related to the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern B and the performance mode related to the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern C are the same, and this production mode and the stop display of the small winning pattern are the same. You may make it differ from the production mode which concerns on a later time saving state.

In addition, instead of generating a time-saving state by deriving a small winning pattern as a big hitting determination result by a big hit determination or by deriving a losing pattern B, C as a losing pattern type determination result by a losing type determination, for example, It may be determined whether or not to generate a time-saving state before the big hit determination (time-saving determination). In this case, for example, a random number (time-saving random number) such as a jackpot random number is provided separately, and the judgment value of the time-saving random number is to generate a time-saving state and not to generate a time-saving state like a jackpot judgment. You may make it perform the time reduction determination which collates with the time reduction determination table distributed suitably. Then, when it is determined in the time saving determination that the time saving state is generated, the time saving state may be set after the stop display of the small winning pattern or the stop display of the losing pattern. Also, in this case, if the determination result that the time saving state is generated in the time saving determination is derived, and if the determination result that the time saving state is not generated is derived in the time saving determination, the small hit pattern or the losing pattern You can make it different. Furthermore, when the judgment result that the time saving state is generated is derived by the time saving judgment, the type of the small winning pattern or the losing pattern is determined from a plurality of types, and the big winning according to the first embodiment Like the pattern type determination and the losing pattern type determination, the time saving prescribed number of times (end condition) may differ according to the type of the small winning pattern or the losing pattern.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment and the first embodiment according to the present invention described above. In the following, as the fourth embodiment, mainly the basic embodiment and the points different from the first embodiment will be described. Also, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the basic embodiment and the same configuration as the first embodiment, or for the configuration similarly corresponding to that of the first embodiment.

In the fourth embodiment, the jackpot design type determined in the special figure 1 jackpot design type determination is different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot pattern A, jackpot pattern B, and jackpot pattern C, there are jackpot pattern G and jackpot pattern H as the jackpot pattern types that can be determined in the special figure 1 jackpot pattern type determination.

FIG. 68(A) shows a configuration example of the special figure 1 jackpot symbol type determination table. As shown in FIG. 68 (A), in the fourth embodiment, when the special figure 1 jackpot pattern type determination is performed based on the special figure 1 jackpot pattern type determination table, the jackpot pattern A is determined with a probability of 15%, A jackpot pattern B is determined with a probability of 35%, a jackpot pattern C is determined with a probability of 20%, a jackpot pattern G is determined with a probability of 15%, and a jackpot pattern H is determined with a probability of 15%. However, the determined probability of each jackpot symbol type can be changed as appropriate.

Also in the fourth embodiment, the jackpot game component is associated with the jackpot symbol type, and the jackpot game is performed based on the jackpot game control table. FIG. 68(B) shows a configuration example of a jackpot game control table.

As shown in FIG. 68(B), in the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol G (hereinafter also referred to as "seventh jackpot game"), four round games are played. In each round game from 1R to 4R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for 15.0 seconds at maximum per one round game. Moreover, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 15.0 seconds from the start of the seventh jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 5.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the seventh jackpot game.

Also in the jackpot game associated with the jackpot pattern H (hereinafter also referred to as "eighth jackpot game"), the round game is performed four times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 4R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for 15.0 seconds at maximum per one round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 5.0 seconds from the start of the eighth jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the eighth jackpot game.

Also, the game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence or absence of the end condition, and the content of the end condition are also associated with the jackpot symbol type related to the jackpot game, as in the first embodiment. FIG. 68(C) shows a configuration example of a game state setting table showing the relationship between the jackpot symbol type, the game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence or absence of the termination condition, and the content of the termination condition. As shown in FIG. 68(C), after the jackpot symbol G, the game is controlled in a high-probability low-base game state. Then, no termination condition is set for the high-probability state associated with the high-probability low base. On the other hand, after the jackpot symbol H, the game is controlled in a low-probability low-base game state. In this way, after the jackpot game related to the jackpot pattern G and the jackpot game associated with the jackpot pattern H, the game is controlled in a non-time-saving state, so basically the first start port 11 by "left hitting" A game for performing a special figure 1 variable display by winning a prize will be performed. Although the details will be described later, in the high-probability low-base game state after the big-hit symbol G and the low-probability low-base game state after the big-hit symbol H, a common performance mode (latent mode) is performed.

By the way, in the first embodiment, when the stop display of the small winning symbols and the stop display of the losing symbols B and C are performed, the time saving state may be set according to the stop table. Whether or not to set the time saving state and the end condition related to the time saving state when setting the time saving state are the game state setting table (game state setting table for small winning symbol stop display, game state setting table for losing symbol stop display ) was determined based on In the fourth embodiment as well, when the stop display of the small winning symbols and the stop display of the losing symbols B and C are performed, the game state setting table (game state setting table for small winning symbol stop display, game state setting table for losing symbol stop display, A game state or the like to be controlled thereafter is determined based on the setting table).

69(A) to 69(D) show game state setting tables relating to the stop display of small winning symbols and losing symbols B and C. FIG. FIG. 69 (A) is a game state setting table (game state setting table for low probability non-time-saving small winning symbol stop display) related to the stop display of the small winning symbol in the low probability low base game state, and FIG. 69 (B) is a game state setting table (low 69 (C) is a game state setting table for stop display of small winning symbols other than probability non-time-saving), and FIG. 69 (C) is a game state setting table (low probability non- 69(D) shows game states other than the low-probability low-base game state, that is, the high-probability low-base game state, the high-probability high-base game state, and the low-probability It is a game state setting table (game state setting table for stop display of losing symbols other than low-probability non-time-saving) relating to stop display of losing symbols B and C in a high-base gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 69 (A), a time saving state is set according to the stop display of the small winning pattern in the low probability low base game state, and the end condition of the time saving state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display "150 times”. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 69(B), the time saving state is not set according to the stop display of the small winning symbols in the high-probability low base game state, the high-probability high-base game state, and the low-probability high base game state. Therefore, in the low-probability low-base game state after the jackpot game related to the jackpot pattern H, when the jackpot pattern H is left-handed and the special figure 1 variable display is performed, if the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, it shifts to the time-saving state, but the jackpot pattern H. In the high-probability low-base game state after the jackpot game related to the pattern G, even if the small-hit pattern is stopped and displayed in the situation where the special figure 1 variable display is performed by hitting to the left, it does not shift to the time-saving state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 69(C), the time saving state is set according to the stop display of the losing symbols B and C in the low probability low base game state. Here, the end condition of the time saving state related to the losing design B is the number of executions of the special figure variable display "150 times", and the end condition of the time saving state related to the losing design C is the number of executions of the special figure variable display "50 times”. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 69 (D), the time saving state is set according to the stop display of the losing symbols B and C in the high probability low base game state, the high probability high base game state, and the low probability high base game state. not. Therefore, in the low-probability low base game state after the jackpot game related to the jackpot pattern H, when the losing patterns B and C are stopped and displayed in a situation where the special figure 1 variable display is performed by hitting to the left, it shifts to the time saving state. In the high-probability low-base game state after the jackpot game related to the jackpot pattern G, even if the losing patterns B and C are stopped and displayed in a situation where the special figure 1 variable display is performed by hitting to the left, it does not shift to the time saving state.

Next, a characteristic portion of the game flow of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. It should be noted that descriptions of parts common to the game flow according to the first embodiment described based on FIG. 63 will be omitted. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a characteristic part of the game flow of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 70, when the game is played in the normal game state, in other words, in the normal effect mode, the effects of the first normal effect stage, the second normal effect stage, and the third normal effect stage are performed. When the jackpot symbol G is stopped during execution, the seventh jackpot game is executed according to the stop display, and when the jackpot pattern H is stopped and displayed, the stop display is performed. Accordingly, the eighth jackpot game is executed.

As described above, the jackpot game components of the seventh jackpot game and the jackpot game components of the eighth jackpot game are set to be the same. Then, although the explanation of specific production contents is omitted, in the seventh jackpot game and the eighth jackpot game, a common second jackpot production mode dedicated to the seventh jackpot game and the eighth jackpot game is set. A common opening performance, a round game performance, and an ending performance are performed exclusively for the 7th big winning game and the 8th big winning game. Therefore, from the point of view of performance, when the seventh big winning game and the eighth big winning game are being executed, which big winning game is being executed, that is, which big winning symbol type of the big winning symbol G or the big winning symbol H is stopped. It is difficult to determine whether it has been displayed.

Then, according to the end of the seventh jackpot game related to the jackpot pattern G, a high-probability low-base game state is set, and after the jackpot game, the game is played in the high-probability low-base game state, while the jackpot pattern. A low-probability low-base game state is set in response to the end of the eighth jackpot game related to H, and the game is played in the low-probability low-base game state after the jackpot game. In the high-probability low-base game state related to the jackpot pattern G and the low-probability low-base game state related to the jackpot pattern H, a common hiding effect mode dedicated to the game state is set, and the effect by the hiding effect mode (especially, Special figure fluctuation production) is performed.

It should be noted that, although the description of the specific production content by the latent production mode is omitted, in the latent production mode, the background image dedicated to the latent production mode is displayed in the same way as the probability variable production mode and the time saving production mode, and the latent production mode Dedicated BGM is output from the speaker 52 . In addition, in the hiding effect mode, ready-to-win effects (SP reach, L reach) and notice effects exclusively for the hiding effect mode are performed.

In the high-probability low-base game state related to the jackpot pattern G and the low-probability low-base game state related to the jackpot pattern H, the game is played in a non-time-saving state consisting of the same constituent elements of the ease of opening the second start port 12. It is difficult for the player to distinguish between the high-probability low-base game state and the low-probability low-base game state because the performance is executed in the same common hidden performance mode.

Then, in the high-probability low-base game state related to the jackpot pattern G, the low-probability low-base game state related to the jackpot pattern H, and the latent performance mode, the player hits left to win the first start port 11, and the special figure 1. When the jackpot symbol C is stopped and displayed in a state where the variable display is executed, the third jackpot game is executed in the same manner as in the normal game state, and the first jackpot game is executed in the third jackpot game. Production mode is set. Then, in accordance with the end of the third jackpot game, the time saving specified number of times as the end condition is 100 times, and the time saving state using the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the first time saving state is set with a low probability. While shifting to a high base game state, it shifts to a time reduction performance mode. In addition, the first jackpot effect mode is the same as the jackpot effect mode in the first embodiment.

In addition, in the low-probability low-base game state related to the jackpot pattern H, and in the latent production mode, the first start port 11 is won by hitting left, and the special figure 1 variable display is performed. When the stop display of the losing pattern B and the stop display of the small winning pattern are performed, as in the case of the normal game state, according to the stop display, the prescribed number of times of time saving as an end condition is 150 times, and the second A time-saving state using a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for time-saving state is set to shift to a low-probability high-base game state and shift to a super-chance mode. On the other hand, when the stop display of the losing pattern C is performed, according to the stop display, the time saving specified number of times as the end condition is 50 times, and the time saving state in which the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the third time saving state is used is set to shift to a low-probability high-base game state and shift to a short-chance mode.

In this way, when the low-probability low-base game state related to the big-hit pattern H and the low-probability low-base game state, and the latent effect mode, when the small-hit patterns and the losing patterns B and C are stopped and displayed, as in the case of the normal game state, according to the stop display. Then, a time saving state is set, and the state shifts to a low probability high base game state, and shifts to a super chance mode or a short chance mode. However, in the fourth embodiment, even if the high probability low base game state related to the jackpot pattern G and the small hit pattern and the losing patterns B and C are stopped and displayed in the latent production mode, the time saving state is not set, and , Do not shift to super chance mode or short chance mode. That is, the high-probability low-base game state and the hiding effect mode continue.

It should be noted that, in the low-probability low-base gaming state, and when the small winning pattern and the losing pattern B are stopped and displayed in the latent production mode, the special figure fluctuation production, as shown in FIG. Stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed in a mode (first special mode) that suggests the winning and the losing of the losing symbol B and suggests that the super-chance mode is set. On the other hand, in the low-probability low-base gaming state, and when the losing pattern C is stopped and displayed in the hiding production mode, the special figure fluctuation production will finally display "the losing pattern C is lost" as shown in FIG. is suggested, and the stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed in a mode (second special mode) suggesting that the short chance mode is set. However, in the high-probability low-base gaming state, and in the hiding production mode, when the small winning patterns and the losing patterns B and C are stopped and displayed, the special figure fluctuation production finally has the first special aspect and the second special aspect. The stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is not performed, and the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a mode showing a normal loss as shown in FIG. 20(F).

In addition, the latent performance mode associated with the high-probability low-base gaming state continues unless the jackpot is won, but in the latency performance mode associated with the low-probability low-base gaming state, the special figure variation presentation (special figure variation display) is executed 100 times. When it is done, it ends, and it shifts from the latent production mode to the normal production mode.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the fourth embodiment, the small winning symbols and the losing symbols B and C are stopped and displayed in the low-probability low-base game state related to the big winning symbol H and in the latent production mode. Then, in accordance with the stop display, a time saving state is set and the game shifts to a low probability high base game state, and also shifts to a super chance mode or a short chance mode. On the other hand, in the pachinko game machine PY1 according to the fourth embodiment, in the high-probability low-base game state related to the big-hit symbol G and in the latent production mode, even if the small-hit symbols and the losing symbols B and C are stopped and displayed, , the time saving state is not set according to the stop display, and the high-probability low-base game state and the hiding performance mode continue without shifting to the super chance mode or the short chance mode. As a result, the player is provided with an opportunity to become advantageous to the player other than winning the jackpot, and while the game becomes more profound and the interest in the game improves, the player becomes extremely advantageous and the interest in the game decreases. can be prevented. In addition, in the low-probability low-base game state and the high-probability low-base game state, the same special figure 1 is stopped and displayed even though the production is performed in a common hiding production mode that makes it difficult to distinguish the game state. Even if it is a low probability state, it moves to a time saving state, while if it is a high probability state, it does not move to a time saving state, so if you pay attention to the stop display of special figure 1, the jackpot winning probability It is possible to determine the game state related to.

(Modified example of the fourth embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. It should be noted that the fourth embodiment can also be applied to the modified example of the first embodiment as long as there is no contradiction (matching). In the fourth embodiment, the jackpot pattern H is provided as a jackpot pattern type paired with the jackpot pattern G, but the jackpot pattern H may not be provided. That is, the low-probability high-base game state may not be set when the jackpot game ends. Therefore, in this case, when the high-probability low-base game state after the jackpot game is set and the performance in the hiding performance mode is performed, it can be easily determined that the high-probability low-base game state is set.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, when the stop display of the losing symbols B and C and the stop display of the small winning symbols are performed in the low-probability low-base game state related to the jackpot symbol H, the time-saving state is set according to the stop display. However, the time saving state may not be set for all or part of these stop displays. In this case, the same applies to the super chance mode and the short chance mode.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, no end condition is provided for the high-probability low-base game state related to the jackpot symbol G, but an end condition may be provided. In this case, for example, the number of executions of the special figure variable display may be set as the end condition. Then, in both the high-probability low base game state related to the jackpot symbol G and the low-probability low base game state related to the jackpot symbol H, the special figure variable display is performed for the number of executions of the special figure variable display related to the end condition. When executed, the hiding performance mode may be ended and the hiding performance mode may be shifted to the normal performance mode.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment, the first embodiment, and the fourth embodiment according to the present invention described above. The fifth embodiment is common to the fourth embodiment in that a jackpot pattern G and a jackpot pattern H are mainly provided as the jackpot pattern types of the special figure 1 . The contents of the jackpot game related to the jackpot pattern G and the jackpot pattern H (jackpot game components), the game state after the jackpot game, and the end conditions are also common to the fourth embodiment. In the following, as the fifth embodiment, differences from the basic embodiment, the first embodiment, and the fourth embodiment will be mainly described. In addition, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiment, the first embodiment, and the fourth embodiment, or similar corresponding configurations.

In the fifth embodiment, unlike the fourth embodiment, in addition to the low-probability low-base game state related to the big-win pattern H, the small-win symbols are stopped and displayed even in the high-probability low-base game state related to the big-win pattern G. is performed, and when the stop display of the losing symbols B and C is performed, a time saving state is set according to the stop display, and the state shifts to a high probability high base game state. In addition, the time-saving state corresponding to the stop display of the small winning patterns and the losing patterns B and C in the low probability low base game state, and the stop display of the small winning patterns and the losing patterns B and C in the high probability low base game state. Depending on the time-saving state, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 (ease of opening), that is, the elements that make up the time-saving state (opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game, normal figure fluctuation time, and Winning probability: hereinafter referred to as “time saving state component”) and end conditions may differ.

FIG. 71 shows a game state setting table relating to the stop display of the small winning symbols and the losing symbols B and C. As shown in FIG. FIG. 71(A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a game state setting table (game state setting table for low probability non-time-saving small winning symbol stop display) related to the stop display of the small winning symbol in the low probability low base gaming state. 71 (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a game state setting table (game state setting table for high probability non-time-saving small winning symbol stop display) related to stop display of small winning symbols in high probability low base game state, FIG. (C) is a configuration example of the game state setting table (game state setting table for time-saving small winning symbol stop display) in the case of stopping display of small winning symbols in the high probability high base gaming state and the low probability high base gaming state. FIG. 71(D) shows a configuration example of a game state setting table (game state setting table for low-probability non-short-time losing symbol stop display) related to stop display of losing symbols B and C in a low-probability low-base game state. FIG. 71(E) shows a configuration example of a game state setting table (game state setting table for high-probability non-time-saving losing symbols stop display) related to stop display of losing symbols B and C in a high-probability low base game state. FIG. 71(F) is a game state setting table (game state setting table for stop display of time-saving losing symbols) related to the stop display of losing symbols B and C in the high-probability high-base game state and the low-probability high-base game state. It is a figure which shows the structural example of.

In addition, in the game state setting table for low-probability non-time-saving losing design stop display, there is a game state setting table for low-probability non-time-saving losing design stop display related to losing design B (low-probability non-time-saving losing design stop display game state setting table table) and a game state setting table for low-probability non-time-saving losing design stop display related to losing design C (low-probability non-time-saving losing design stop display game state setting table), and high probability non-time-saving losing design stop. The game state setting table for display includes a game state setting table for high-probability non-time-saving losing design stop display related to losing design B (game state setting table for high-probability non-time-saving losing design B stop display) and a game state setting table for losing design C. There is a game state setting table for high-probability non-time-saving losing symbol stop display (high-probability non-time-saving losing symbol C stop display game state setting table), and the game state setting table for time-saving losing symbol stop display includes losing symbol B. A game state setting table for time-saving losing symbol stop display (game state setting table for time-saving losing symbol B stop display) and a game state setting table for time-saving losing symbol stop display related to losing symbol C (for time-saving losing symbol C stop display game state setting table). That is, the gaming state and the losing symbol type are associated with each other in the gaming state setting table related to the losing symbol.

Here, the time saving state in the fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, the time saving state includes a first time saving state and a second time saving state. Although the details of each time saving state are different, the opening easiness (easiness of opening) of the second starting port 12 related to the time saving state, that is, the time saving state component differs depending on the type of the time saving state.

As shown in FIGS. 71(A) to 71(F), in the low-probability low-base game state, when the stop display of the small winning symbol, the stop display of the losing symbol B, and the stop display of the losing symbol C are performed, A first time saving state is set. Then, the end condition of the first time-saving state related to the small winning pattern and the losing pattern B is set to 100 times of the special figure variable display (execution number of times of the special figure variable display "100 times"), and the losing pattern End condition of the 1st time saving state which relates to C, special figure variable indication number is done 50 times (execution frequency “50 times” of special figure variable indication) it is set. Further, in the high-probability low-base game state, when the stop display of the small winning symbol, the stop display of the losing symbol B, and the stop display of the losing symbol C are performed, the second time saving state is set. And end conditions are not set to the second time saving state. In other words, when the second time saving state is set, the second time saving state continues until the jackpot is won. In the high-probability high-base game state and the low-probability high-base game state, if the stop display of the small winning symbol, the stop display of the losing symbol B, and the stop display of the losing symbol C are performed, it is different from the case of the first embodiment. Similarly, the time saving state continues without being newly set.

Next, the first time saving state and the opening easiness of the second starting port 12 related to the second time saving state (ease of opening), that is, the first time saving state and the time saving state component related to the second time saving state explain. Even in the fifth embodiment, as a component related to the ease of opening the second start port 12 in the time saving state (ease of opening), the winning probability related to the hit determination, the normal figure fluctuation time related to the normal figure fluctuation display, And there is an opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game. Then, the hit determination is performed using the hit determination table, the normal pattern variation pattern determination that determines the normal pattern variation time is performed using the normal pattern variation pattern determination table, and the auxiliary game that the second start port 12 opens It is performed using an auxiliary game control table. Any table is divided into a table used in the non-time saving state, a table used in the first time saving state, and a table used in the second time saving state.

FIG. 72 (A) shows a configuration example of a hit determination table according to the fifth embodiment, FIG. 72 (B) shows a configuration example of a normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table according to the fifth embodiment, FIG. 72 (C) shows a configuration example of the auxiliary game control table according to the fifth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 72 (A), when the hit determination table for the non-time saving state is used, it is determined to be hit with a probability of 6600/65536, and when the hit determination table for the first time saving state is used is determined to be a hit with a probability of 50000/65536, and when the hit determination table for the second short time state is used, it is determined to be a hit with a probability of 59936/65536. Therefore, it is likely to be determined to be hit by hit determination in the order of the second time saving state> first time saving state>non-time saving state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), when the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state is used, the normal pattern fluctuation time is determined to be 30 seconds regardless of the type of normal pattern to be stopped, When the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the first short time state is used, the normal figure fluctuation time is determined to be 7 seconds regardless of the type of normal figure to be stopped, and the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination for the second short time state When the table is used, regardless of the type of normal pattern to be stopped, the normal pattern fluctuation time is determined to be 5 seconds. Therefore, the number of executions per unit time of the normal figure fluctuation display increases (execution frequency) in the order of the second time saving state> first time saving state>non-time saving state.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 72 (C), when the auxiliary game control table for the non-time saving state is used, the opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game becomes 0.2 seconds, and the first time saving state When the auxiliary game control table for is used, the opening time of the second start port 12 in the auxiliary game is 3.5 seconds, and when the auxiliary game control table for the second time saving state is used, the auxiliary game The opening time of the second starting port 12 at is 5.0 seconds. Therefore, in the order of the second time saving state>first time saving state>non-time saving state, the opening time of the second start port 12 in one auxiliary game becomes longer.

Thus, according to the game state (non-time saving state, first time saving state, second time saving state) related to the ease of opening the second start port 12, hit determination table, normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table, and auxiliary game The control table is different, the winning probability is higher in the order of the second time saving state> first time saving state> non-time saving state, and the normal figure fluctuation time is in the order of the second time saving state> first time saving state> non-time saving state Short, the opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game is long in the order of the second time saving state>first time saving state>non time saving state. As described above, as the winning probability increases, the easiness of opening the second starting port 12 increases, and the easiness of opening the second starting port 12 increases as the normal pattern fluctuation time decreases, and the second in the auxiliary game. The ease of opening the second starting port 12 increases as the opening time of the starting port 12 increases. Therefore, in view of this, the ease of opening the second start port 12 increases in the order of the second time saving state> first time saving state> non-time saving state, and the player can ask about the ease of opening the second start port 12 It can be said that it is an advantageous game state.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101, in order to select the hit determination table associated with the type of time saving state, the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table, and the auxiliary game control table, open the second start port 12 at that time It is necessary to specify the game state related to ease. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the game state is the low-probability low-base game state or the high-probability low-base game state in the game state setting process (S1507) after displaying the small winning symbols. to confirm. Then, in the low probability low base gaming state, in order to set the first time saving state, the time saving flag indicating that it is the first time saving state triggered by the stop display of the small winning pattern (second after displaying the small winning pattern 1 time-saving flag) is turned on in the time-saving flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the first time-saving state, and a game state command indicating that it is the first time-saving state triggered by the stop display of the small winning symbol is issued for the game. It is set in the output buffer of RAM 104 . On the other hand, if it is a high probability low base game state, in order to set the second time saving state, the time saving flag indicating that it is the second time saving state triggered by the stop display of the small winning pattern (second after displaying the small winning pattern) 2 time saving flag) is turned on in the time saving flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the second time saving state, and a game state command indicating that it is the second time saving state triggered by the stop display of the small winning symbol is issued for the game. It is set in the output buffer of RAM 104 .

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 confirms whether the game state is the low-probability low-base game state or the high-probability low-base game state in the game state setting process after displaying the losing symbols (S1509). Then, in the low-probability low-base game state, the game control microcomputer 101 confirms the next stop-displayed losing symbol type. Here, when the losing pattern type is the losing pattern B, in order to set the first time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing pattern B, it is the first time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing pattern B. A time saving flag indicating that (first time saving flag after displaying the losing pattern B) is turned ON in the time saving flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the first time saving state, and the first time saving triggered by the stop display of the losing pattern B. A game state command indicating the state is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 . On the other hand, when the losing pattern type is the losing pattern C, in order to set the first time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing pattern C, it is the first time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing pattern C. The time saving flag (the first time saving flag after displaying the losing pattern C) is turned ON in the time saving flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the first time saving state, and the first time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing pattern C. A game state command indicating that is is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 . Further, in the high-probability low-base game state, the game control microcomputer 101 confirms the losing symbol type that is stopped and displayed next, and if the losing symbol type is the losing symbol B, the losing symbol B is stopped. In order to set the second time saving state triggered by the display, a time saving flag (second time saving flag after displaying the losing pattern B) indicating the second time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing pattern B is set in the game RAM 104. A second time-saving state is set by turning ON the time-saving flag area of , and a game state command indicating the second time-saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing pattern B is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the losing pattern type is the losing pattern C, in order to set the second time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing pattern C, it is the second time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing pattern C. The time saving flag (first time saving flag after displaying the losing pattern C) is turned ON in the time saving flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the first time saving state, and the second time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing pattern C. A game state command indicating that is is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 .

Therefore, the game control microcomputer 101, in the normal symbol standby process of step S1102, when performing the hit determination, after displaying the small winning symbol first time saving flag, after losing symbol B displaying first time saving flag, and after losing symbol C display When the first time-saving flag is ON, the hit determination table for the first time-saving state is selected, and the second time-saving flag after displaying the small winning design, the second time-saving flag after displaying the losing design B, and the losing design C are displayed. When the second time saving flag is ON, the hit determination table for the second time saving state is selected. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101, in the normal symbol standby process of step S1102, when performing the normal pattern variation pattern determination, the first time saving flag after displaying the small winning symbol, the first time saving flag after displaying the losing symbol B, and the losing symbol When the first time saving flag after displaying C is ON, select the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the first time saving state, the second time saving flag after displaying the small winning pattern, the second time saving flag after displaying the losing pattern B , and when the second time saving flag is turned on after the display of the lost pattern C, the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the second time saving state is selected. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 performs control of the auxiliary game in the auxiliary game control process of step S1105 (opens the second starting port 12), after the small winning design display first time saving flag, losing design B display When the post-first time-saving flag and the post-loss symbol C display first time-saving flag are ON, the auxiliary game control table for the first time-saving state is selected, and the second time-saving flag after the display of the small winning symbol and the losing symbol. When the second time saving flag after B display and the second time saving flag after losing symbol C display are ON, the auxiliary game control table for the second time saving state is selected.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 selects the hit determination table for the second time saving state when performing the hit determination in the normal symbol standby process of step S1102 when the time saving flag after the jackpot game state is turned on, In the normal design standby process of step S1102, when performing the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination, select the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table for the second time saving state, and control the auxiliary game in the auxiliary game control process of step S1105 ( When the second starting port 12 is opened), the auxiliary game control table for the second time saving state is selected. That is, when the time saving state is set according to the end of the jackpot game, the second time saving state is set.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 turns on the first time saving flag after displaying the small winning pattern and the first time saving flag after displaying the losing pattern B, as the end condition of the time saving state, the special figure variable which is the time saving prescribed number of times Set the display execution number "100 times" to the time saving remaining number counter. On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 turns on the first time saving flag after displaying the losing pattern C, the number of times of execution of the special figure variable display, which is the specified number of times of time saving, is "50 times" as the end condition of the time saving state. Set the number counter. In addition, since the end condition is not set in the second time saving state, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the second time saving flag after displaying the small winning symbol, the second time saving flag after displaying the losing symbol B, and the second time saving flag after displaying the losing symbol C. When the flag is turned on, the specified number of times of shortening of working hours is not set in the remaining number of times of shortening of hours counter. It should be noted that, as in the case of the first embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101, when turning on the time saving flag after the jackpot game state according to the jackpot symbols A, B, D, and E, sets the time saving prescribed number of times to the time saving remaining number counter. , and when the time saving flag is turned ON after the jackpot game state related to the jackpot symbols C and F, the number of executions of the special figure variable display, which is the specified number of times of saving time, "100 times" is set to the remaining number of times of saving time counter. .

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the normal probability state is set as the game state related to the jackpot winning probability, and the game state in which the first time-saving state is set as the game state related to the ease of opening the second start port 12 is referred to as a "first low-probability high-base gaming state". Similarly, the normal probability state is set, and the gaming state in which the second time saving state is set is referred to as "second low probability high base gaming state", the high probability state is set, and the second time saving state is set is referred to as "high probability high base game state".

Also, in the fifth embodiment, for the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table, in the second time saving state, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the first time saving state according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 50 (B) ) is used, and in the first time saving state related to the small hit pattern and the losing pattern B, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the second time saving state according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 51 (A)) is used , In the first time saving state related to the lost pattern C, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 51 (B)) for the third time saving state according to the first embodiment is used.

Next, a characteristic part of the game flow of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. Descriptions of the parts common to the game flow according to the first embodiment explained based on FIG. 63 and the parts common to the game flow according to the fourth embodiment explained based on FIG. 70 will be omitted. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a characteristic part of the game flow of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 73, when the game is played in the normal game state, in other words, in the normal effect mode, the effects of the first normal effect stage, the second normal effect stage, and the third normal effect stage are performed. During execution, the flow from the stop display of the jackpot pattern G to the setting of the high-probability low base game state and the setting of the latent performance mode and the stop display of the jackpot pattern H are performed. The flow from when the low-probability low base game state is set and until the latent effect mode is set is the same as in the fourth embodiment.

Then, in the high-probability low-base game state related to the jackpot pattern G or the low-probability low-base game state related to the jackpot pattern H, and in the latent performance mode, the first start port 11 is won by hitting to the left, and the special figure 1 When the jackpot symbol A is stopped and displayed in a state where the variable display is executed, the first jackpot game is executed and the first jackpot game is finished in the same manner as in the normal game state. In response to this, it shifts to a high probability high base game state and shifts to a variable probability performance mode. Similarly, when the big win pattern B is stopped and displayed, the second big win game is executed and the second big win game is finished with a high probability. While shifting to a high base game state, it shifts to a variable probability performance mode. Also, in the high-probability low-base game state related to the big-hit pattern G or the low-probability low-base game state related to the big-hit pattern H, and in the latent performance mode, the first start port 11 is won by hitting to the left, and the special figure 1 When the jackpot symbol C is stopped and displayed in a state where the variable display is executed, the third jackpot game is executed and the third jackpot game is finished in the same manner as in the normal game state. Accordingly, a second time-saving state in which the specified number of times of time-saving is 100 is set as an end condition, and the game is shifted to a low-probability high base game state and to a time-saving performance mode. In the first jackpot game, the second jackpot game, and the third jackpot game, the first jackpot performance mode is set, and the opening performance, round performance, and ending performance corresponding to each jackpot game are executed. This first jackpot effect mode is the same as the jackpot effect mode of the first embodiment.

In addition, in the low-probability low-base game state related to the jackpot pattern H, and in the latent production mode, the first start port 11 is won by hitting left, and the special figure 1 variable display is performed. When the stop display of the losing pattern B and the stop display of the small winning pattern are performed, according to the stop display, a first time saving state in which the prescribed number of time saving is 100 times is set, and a first low probability high base game state is set. and shift to super chance mode. On the other hand, when the stop display of the losing pattern C is performed, the first time saving state in which the prescribed number of time saving is 50 times is set according to the stop display, and the state is shifted to the first low probability high base game state. Switch to chance mode.

On the other hand, in the high-probability low-base game state related to the jackpot symbol G, and in the latent production mode, the game is played in which the first start port 11 is won by hitting to the left and the special figure 1 variable display is executed, When the stop display of the small winning pattern, the stop display of the losing pattern B, and the stop display of the losing pattern C are performed, the end condition, specifically, the second time saving specified number of times is not provided according to the stop display. A time-saving state is set to shift to a high-probability high-base game state and shift to a probability variable performance mode.

In this way, when the low-probability low-base game state related to the big-hit pattern H and the low-probability low-base game state, and when the small-hit pattern and the losing patterns B and C are stopped in the latent production mode, the first time-saving state is set according to the stop display. , transition to the first low-probability high-base game state, and transition to a super-chance mode or a short-chance mode. On the other hand, when the high probability low base game state related to the big hit pattern G and the small hit pattern and the losing patterns B and C are stopped and displayed in the latent production mode, the second start rather than the first time saving state according to the stop display The ease of opening the mouth 12 is high, in other words, a second time-saving state advantageous to the player is set, and the game shifts to a high-probability high-base game state and also to a variable-probability performance mode.

It should be noted that, in the low-probability low-base gaming state, and when the small winning pattern and the losing pattern B are stopped and displayed in the latent production mode, the special figure fluctuation production, as shown in FIG. Stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed in a mode (first special mode) that suggests the winning and the losing of the losing symbol B and suggests that the super-chance mode is set. On the other hand, in the low-probability low-base gaming state, and when the losing pattern C is stopped and displayed in the hiding production mode, the special figure fluctuation production will finally display "the losing pattern C is lost" as shown in FIG. is suggested, and the stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed in a mode (second special mode) suggesting that the short chance mode is set. However, in the high-probability low-base game state and the latent production mode, when the small winning patterns and the losing patterns B and C are stopped and displayed, in the special figure fluctuation production, finally, the small winning and losing patterns B and C Stop display of production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 is performed in a manner suggesting that the probability variation production mode is set. In the fifth embodiment, super-chance mode suggestive images are used as "modes suggesting that a small hit and the loss of the losing patterns B and C are suggested, and that the probability variable production mode is set" related to the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3. As in the case of G32 and the short chance mode suggestive image G33, the left production pattern EZ1 is an image containing the characters "probable variable production" (left probability variable production mode suggestive image), and the middle production pattern EZ2 is an image containing the characters "mode" (middle Probable variable production mode suggestive image), and right production pattern EZ3 is composed of an image including the character "plunge" (right probability variable production mode suggestive image).

In addition, the latent performance mode associated with the high-probability low-base gaming state continues unless the jackpot is won, but in the latency performance mode associated with the low-probability low-base gaming state, the special figure variation presentation (special figure variation display) is executed 100 times. When it is done, it ends, and it shifts from the latent production mode to the normal production mode.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the fifth embodiment, the small winning symbols and the losing symbols B and C are stopped and displayed in the low-probability low-base game state related to the big winning symbol H and in the latent production mode. Then, according to the stop display, the first time-saving state is set, and the mode shifts to the super-chance mode or the short-chance mode. On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the fifth embodiment, when the stop display of the small winning symbols and the losing symbols B and C is performed in the high probability low base game state related to the big winning symbol G and the latent production mode, The easiness of opening the second starting port 12 is higher than that of the first time-saving state, in other words, the second time-saving state advantageous to the player is set to shift to a high-probability high-base game state, and a latent performance mode. Shift to a different probability production mode. In short, when staying in the same latent production mode in which it is difficult to distinguish between the same non-time-saving state and the high probability state or the low probability state for the ease of opening the second start port 12, When the losing symbols B and C are stopped and displayed, the set time-saving state and production mode differ depending on the difference in the game state (high-probability state or low-probability state) related to the jackpot winning probability. Therefore, the game performance is advanced and the game interest is improved.

In addition, when staying in a high probability state that is advantageous to the player, the second time saving state is set in which the ease of opening the second start port 12 is advantageous to the player, so that the game characteristics are undulating. It becomes more intense and the amusement of the game is further improved. Furthermore, the end condition of the first time-saving state related to the stop display of the small winning pattern and the stop display of the losing pattern B in the low probability low base gaming state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display "100 times", low probability low The end condition of the first time-saving state related to the stop display of the losing pattern C in the base game state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display "50 times", whereas the stop of the small winning pattern in the high probability low base game state There is no end condition for the second time saving state related to the display, the stop display of the losing symbol B, and the stop display of the losing symbol C. That is, regarding the end condition, the second time saving state is more advantageous to the player than the first time saving state. Thus, when the player stays in the high-probability state advantageous to the player, the end condition is set to the second time-saving state advantageous to the player. is further improved.

(Modified example of the fifth embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. Note that the modified example of the first embodiment and the modified example of the fourth embodiment can also be appropriately applied to the fifth embodiment within a consistent range (matching range). In the fifth embodiment, when the stop display of the losing symbols B and C and the stop display of the small winning symbols are performed in the high probability low base game state, the same second time saving state is set according to the stop display. For all of these stop displays, or a part of the stop displays, both or one of the opening easiness of the second starting port 12 and the end condition may be set so as not to set a different time saving state. In this case, for all of the time saving state after the stop display of the losing patterns B and C and the stop display of the small winning pattern in the high probability low base game state, the opening ease of the second start port 12 and the Either or both of the termination conditions may be advantageous to the player. Alternatively, part of the time saving state after the stop display of the losing patterns B and C and the stop display of the small winning pattern in the high probability low base game state is both or one of the ease of opening the second start port 12 and the end condition Although the player is more advantageous than the first time-saving state, the rest may be more disadvantageous than the first time-saving state for both or one of the ease of opening the second starting port 12 and the end condition.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 in the time saving state according to the stop display of the losing symbols B and C and the stop display of the small winning symbol in the high probability low base game state, and the end condition , The opening easiness of the second starting port 12 in the time saving state according to the end of the first jackpot game and the second jackpot game, and the end condition are set the same, but the opening easiness of the second starting port 12 , and/or the end condition may be set in favor of or against the player. Furthermore, both or one of the ease of opening the second start port 12 in the time saving state according to the stop display of the losing symbols B and C and the stop display of the small winning symbol in the high probability low base game state, and the end condition When it is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player compared to the time saving state according to the end of the first big winning game and the second big winning game, the time saving according to the stopped display of the losing patterns B and C and the stopped display of the small winning patterns. In the state, instead of the variable probability production mode, a production mode dedicated to the time saving state may be set.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 in the time saving state according to the stop display of the losing symbols B and C and the stop display of the small winning symbol in the high probability low base game state, and the end condition are , The ease of opening the second start port 12 in the time-saving state according to the stop display of the losing symbols B and C and the stop display of the small winning symbols in the low probability low base game state, and the end condition are set. However, both or one of the opening easiness of the second starting port 12 and the end condition may be set to be the same for the stop display of all the symbols or the stop display of some of the symbols. The ease of opening the second starting port 12 in the time saving state corresponding to all or part of the stop display of the losing symbols B and C and the stop display of the small winning symbols in the high probability low base game state is a low probability low base game state. If it is the same as the time saving state according to all or part of the stop display of the losing patterns B and C and the stop display of the small winning patterns in , the stop display of the losing patterns B and C and the stop display of the small winning patterns In the corresponding time saving state, the same production mode (super chance mode or short chance mode) as in the case of the low probability low base gaming state may be set.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, both the ease of opening the second starting port 12 and the termination conditions are configured so that the second time saving state is more advantageous to the player than the first time saving state. , only one of which may be advantageous to the player. In this case, for the other, the first time saving state and the second time saving state may be the same, or the first time saving state may be more advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, all the time saving state components are configured so that the second time saving state is more advantageous to the player than the first time saving state, but only some elements It may be configured such that the second time saving state is more advantageous to the player than the one time saving state. In this case, the super-chance mode or the short-chance mode may be set even in the short-time state corresponding to the stop display of the small winning patterns and the stop display of the losing patterns B and C in the high-probability low-base game state. . In addition, the end condition is not set for the time saving state according to the stop display of the losing patterns B and C and the stop display of the small winning pattern in the high probability low base game state, but all of these time saving states or part of the time saving As for the state, a termination condition may be set. In this case, even if it is the same as the time saving state corresponding to the stop display of the losing symbols B and C and the stop display of the small winning symbols in the low probability low base game state, the losing symbols B and C in the low probability low base game state. It may be advantageous to the player or disadvantageous to the player as compared with the case of the time saving state according to the stop display of 1 and the stop display of the small winning symbol.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, a sixth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment and the first embodiment according to the present invention described above. In the following, as the sixth embodiment, mainly the points different from the basic embodiment and the first embodiment will be described. Note that the same reference numerals and terms are used for the basic embodiment and the same configuration as the first embodiment, or for the configuration similarly corresponding to the first embodiment.

In the sixth embodiment, mainly, the point that the gate 13 is also provided on the first flow path R1 in the left gaming area 6A, the point that the small hit is not provided as the judgment result of the big hit judgment, and the time saving state can be generated is not set to special figure 1, different from the first embodiment in that it is set to special figure 2.

FIG. 74 is a front view of the game board unit YU of the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 74, the gate 13 is provided not only on the second flow path R2 in the right game area 6B but also on the first flow path R1 in the left game area 6A. Although not shown, a series of game ball paths are formed from the gate 13 provided in the left game area 6A to the first starting port 11. As shown in FIG. That is, the game ball that has passed through the gate 13 provided in the left game area 6A may enter the first start port 11 after that. Therefore, in the normal game state (normal production mode), in the situation where the left-handed hitting is performed aiming at the winning of the first start port 11, the game ball passes through the gate 13, the hit determination is performed, and the hit is determined. As a result of the winning and the stop display of the winning normal figure, the auxiliary game may be performed and the second start port 12 may be opened.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, a series of game ball paths to the second starting port 12 are also formed in the left game area 6A. Therefore, in the normal game state (normal production mode), by hitting left, the game ball can be made to enter the open second starting port 12.例文帳に追加

And, in the sixth embodiment, when the second starting port 12 is open in the normal game state (normal production mode), so that the player can win the second starting port 12, non-time saving state The opening time of the second starting port 12 related to the auxiliary game is set to a time during which the player can win the second starting port 12. FIG. 75 shows an auxiliary game control table according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 75, in the sixth embodiment, the number of opening times of the second starting port 12 related to the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state is set to 2 times, and the total opening time of the second starting port 12 is set to 5.0 seconds. ing. Specifically, in the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state, when the second start port 12 is opened for 2.5 seconds as the first time, it is closed once and the interval time is 1.5 seconds. .5 seconds.

Thus, in the sixth embodiment, the game ball may pass through the gate 13 in a situation aiming to win a prize to the first start port 11 in the non-time-saving state, and the second related to the auxiliary game in the non-time-saving state Since the opening time of the starting port 12 is set to the time during which the player can win the second starting port 12, in the normal game state, the special figure 2 jackpot determination is performed in a natural flow and the special figure. 2 variable display may occur. In addition, as will be described later, in the normal game state, with the start of the special figure 2 variable display, a special effect mode different from the normal effect mode is set. The special effect mode ends when the special figure 2 variable display based on the winning to the second starting port 12 related to one auxiliary game ends. When the special performance mode ends, the normal performance mode is restored.

Next, big hit determination and losing symbol type determination according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 76(A) shows a configuration example of the special figure 1 jackpot determination table, and FIG. 76(B) shows a configuration example of the special figure 2 jackpot determination table. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the determination result of the jackpot determination, in detail, as the determination result of the special figure 1 jackpot determination and the determination result of the special figure 2 jackpot determination, "small hit" is not provided. Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the time saving state is not set according to the stop display of the small winning symbol. In both the normal probability state and the high probability state, the jackpot winning probability is set to be the same as in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, the special symbol determination value assigned to "small win" is assigned to "losing" as it is.

Also, FIG. 76(C) shows a configuration example of a lost symbol type determination table. As shown in FIG. 76 (C), in the sixth embodiment, contrary to the case of the first embodiment, one type of losing design type is provided for special figure 1, and three types of losing design for special figure 2 types are provided. The losing pattern A according to the special figure 1 in the sixth embodiment and the losing pattern D according to the special figure 2 are the same as the losing pattern A according to the special figure 1 in the first embodiment and the losing pattern D according to the special figure 2 is configured to That is, the time saving state is not set according to the stop display of the losing pattern A and the stop display of the losing pattern D. On the other hand, the losing design E according to the special figure 2 in the sixth embodiment corresponds to the losing design B according to the special figure 1 in the first embodiment, and the losing design F according to the special figure 2 in the sixth embodiment is the It corresponds to the losing pattern C according to the special figure 1 in one embodiment, and the time saving state may be set according to the stop display of the losing pattern E and the stop display of the losing pattern F.

Although the details will be described later, in the normal game state, in other words, in the low base game state, when the stop display of the losing pattern E and the stop display of the losing pattern F are performed, the time saving state is set according to the stop display. However, in the high base game state, even if the stop display of the losing symbol E and the stop display of the losing symbol F are performed, a new time saving state is not set.

Next, the special figure variation pattern determination according to the sixth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, for the special figure 1 variation pattern, a different special figure 1 variation pattern determination table is used in the non-time saving state and the time saving state, and for the special figure 2 variation pattern, the non-time saving time-saving state after the jackpot game, time-saving state after the stop display of the small winning pattern and the stop display of the losing pattern B, and time-saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern C. A different special figure 2 variation pattern determination table was used at times. In the sixth embodiment, for the special figure 1 variation pattern, a different special figure 1 variation pattern determination table is used in the non-time saving state and the time saving state, and for the special figure 2 variation pattern, non-time saving Special figure 2 different in the state, the time saving state after the jackpot game, the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern E, and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern F. A variation pattern determination table is used. In other words, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table is associated with the game state related to the ease of opening the second start port 12, and the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state There is a table and a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the time saving state. On the other hand, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is associated with the opportunity of the time saving state in addition to the game state related to the ease of opening the second start port 12, and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table includes the non-time saving state The special figure 2 variation pattern determination table, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the time saving state after the jackpot game state (the special figure 2 variation pattern decision table for the big hit time saving state), and the time saving after the losing pattern E stop display Special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for state (loss pattern E special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for time saving state) and special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for time saving state after stopping display of loss pattern F (losing pattern F There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for time saving state).

Figure 77 (A) is a configuration example of the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state, Figure 77 (B) is a configuration example of the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the time saving state, Figure 78 ( A) is a configuration example of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state, FIG. 78 (B) is a configuration example of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the jackpot time saving state, FIG. 79 (A) is a configuration example of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the losing design E time saving state, and FIG. 79B is a configuration example of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the losing design F time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 77 (A) and FIG. 77 (B), both the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state and the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the time saving state are for small hits No special figure 1 variation pattern determination table is provided. This is because, as described above, in the sixth embodiment, "small hit" is not provided as the determination result of the special figure 1 big hit determination. Furthermore, for both the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state and the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the time saving state, there is one type of special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for losing. This is because, as described above, in the sixth embodiment, only one type of "losing design A" is provided as the losing design type related to the special figure 1.

Also, as shown in FIG. 78 (A), in the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state, in addition to the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the lost design D, the special figure for the lost design E There are also 2 variation pattern determination table and special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for losing pattern F, and three special figure 2 variation pattern determination tables are provided as special figure 2 variation pattern determination tables related to loss. This is, as described above, in the sixth embodiment, there are three types of losing pattern types related to the special figure 2: "losing pattern D", "losing pattern E", and "losing pattern F". Since the time-saving state is set according to the stop display of E and the stop display of the losing pattern F, the variable display related to the special figure 2 is used to ensure the time to execute the effect to excite the player. is. In addition, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the losing design E is configured in the same manner as the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the losing design B in the non-time saving state of the first embodiment, and the special figure for the losing design F The 2 variation pattern determination table is configured in the same manner as the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the losing design C in the non-time saving state of the first embodiment. That is, in the non-time-saving state, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display relating to the losing pattern E is performed, the same production as the special figure variation production relating to the losing pattern B in the first embodiment is performed (see FIG. 61 ), when the special figure 2 variation display relating to the losing symbol F is performed, the same effect as the special figure variation presentation relating to the losing symbol C in the first embodiment is performed (see FIG. 62).

As shown in FIG. 78 (B), FIG. 79 (A), and FIG. 79 (B), the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for each time saving state includes the loss pattern type (loss pattern D , Loss pattern E, Loss pattern F) are associated, but only one type is provided as the special figure 2 variation pattern determination veil for the time saving state related to loss. And the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for each time saving state is basically configured in the same manner as the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for each time saving state of the first embodiment.

Next, the game state setting table for newly setting (changing) the game state will be described. When the game state is newly set (changed) according to the end of the jackpot game state, the game state is set based on the game state setting table shown in FIG. A state is set, and an end condition for the game state is set. When the game state is newly set (changed) according to the stop display of the losing symbols, the game state is basically newly set (changed) based on the game state setting table.

In the game state setting table (game state setting table for the stop display of the losing pattern) when the game state is newly set (changed) according to the stop display of the losing pattern, the stop display of the losing pattern is performed in the non-time saving state. A game state setting table for stopping display of losing symbols when it is broken (game state setting table for stopping display of non-time-saving losing symbols) and a game state for stopping display of losing symbols when stopping display of losing symbols is performed in a time-saving state There is a setting table (game state setting table for time saving lost symbol stop display). FIG. 80(A) is a configuration example of a game state setting table for non-time saving losing symbol stop display, and FIG. 80(B) is a configuration example of a game state setting table for time saving losing symbol stop display. That is, the game state is associated with the game state setting table related to the stop display of the losing symbols.

Furthermore, the game state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol stop display includes a game state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol stop display when it is a losing symbol E (game state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol E stop display), There is a game state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol stop display when it is a losing symbol F (game state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol F stop display), and the game state setting table for time-saving losing symbol stop display , a game state setting table for time-saving losing symbol stop display in case of losing symbol E (game state setting table for time-saving losing symbol E stop display) and a game state setting table for time-saving losing symbol stop display in case of losing symbol F. (Game state setting table for time saving lost symbol F stop display). That is, the gaming state and the losing symbol type are associated with each other in the gaming state setting table relating to the stop display of the losing symbols.

As shown in FIGS. 79(A) and 79(B), according to the game state setting table for non-time-saving losing design E stop display and the game state setting table for non-time-saving losing design F stop display, stop of losing design E The time saving state is set according to the display and the stop display of the losing pattern F. The time saving state is not set according to the stop display and the stop display of the lost pattern F.

In this way, the game state setting table for newly setting (changing) the game state is associated with the jackpot determination result. Symbol types are further associated with the game state setting table related to the big win and the game state setting table related to the loss.

In addition, when the time saving state is set according to the stop display of the losing pattern E in the non-time saving state, the end condition of the time saving state is set to "special figure variable display 150 times". That is, the time-saving state ends when the special figure variable display is executed 150 times without winning the jackpot, and becomes a non-time-saving gaming state. On the other hand, when the time saving state is set according to the stop display of the losing pattern F in the non-time saving state, the end condition of the time saving state is set to "50 times of special figure variable display". That is, the time-saving state ends when the special figure variable display is executed 50 times without winning the jackpot, and enters a non-time-saving gaming state.

Next, a process performed by the game control microcomputer 101, which differs from that of the first embodiment, will be described. The processing different from the first embodiment is special operation processing, special symbol standby processing in special operation processing, special figure 1 determination processing, special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing, special figure 2 determination processing, and special figure 2 variation pattern determination and a special symbol determination process in the special action process.

First, special action processing according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 shows a flowchart of special action processing according to the sixth embodiment. In the special action processing according to the sixth embodiment, the processing relating to the special figure indicator 81, the special figure reservation indicator 83 and the big winning device 14D is divided into six statuses (steps). "Special action status=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 8" is assigned to each of these statuses. As shown in FIG. 81, the special action process according to the sixth embodiment is a game state setting process (S1507) after display of the special action status=6 which was included in the special action status in the first embodiment. , And special action status =7 except that the small winning game control process (S1508) is not included, is configured in the same manner as the special action process according to the first embodiment. This is because, in the sixth embodiment, "small win" is not provided as a determination result of the big win determination.

Next, the special figure 1 determination processing according to the sixth embodiment will be described. A flowchart of special figure 1 determination processing according to the sixth embodiment is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 82, the special figure 1 determination process according to the sixth embodiment is the process related to the small hit that was performed in the special figure 1 determination process according to the first embodiment, specifically, the first implementation S1630 to S1632 in the special figure 1 determination process according to the form is not performed, except that it proceeds to step S1633 when it is determined that it is not a jackpot in step S1625, the same as the special figure 1 determination process according to the first embodiment It is configured. In addition, since only one type of the losing pattern A is set for the special figure 1, the pattern type flag indicating the losing pattern A is set in step S1635, and the losing pattern A is shown in step S1636. Designation command is set.

Next, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing according to the sixth embodiment will be described. A flowchart of the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process according to the sixth embodiment is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 83, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process according to the sixth embodiment is the process related to the small hit that was performed in the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process according to the first embodiment, and the losing pattern B , C, specifically, S1646 to S1647 and S1653 to S1655 in the special figure 1 determination process according to the first embodiment are not performed, and when it is determined that it is not a big hit in step S1644, to step S1649 Except for advancing, it is configured in the same manner as the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process according to the first embodiment.

Subsequently, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing according to the sixth embodiment will be described. Flowcharts of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process according to the sixth embodiment are shown in FIGS. As shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, the game control microcomputer 101, in the special figure 2 pattern determination process, first, as step S1680, currently, the game state related to the opening easiness of the second start port 12 is non-time saving state It is determined whether or not. When it determines with the microcomputer 101 for game control being non-time saving state, in step S1681, it will select the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for non-time-saving state, and will progress to step S1687.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is not a non-time saving state in step S1680, that is, it is a time saving state, in step S1682, the type of the time saving flag described later is confirmed, and the time saving state is time saving after the jackpot game. state. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the time saving state is the time saving state after the jackpot game, in step S1683, selects the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the jackpot time saving state, and proceeds to step S1687.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1682 that it is not the time saving state after the jackpot game state, the type of the time saving flag is checked in step S1684, and the time saving state is the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern E. It is determined whether or not. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the time saving state is the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern E, in step S1685, selects the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the losing pattern E time saving state, While proceeding to step S1687, when it is determined that it is not the time saving state after the losing pattern E stop display, that is, the time saving state after the losing pattern F stop display, in step S1686, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern for the losing pattern F time saving state A decision table is selected, and the process proceeds to step S1687.

In step S1687, the game control microcomputer 101 checks the symbol type flag and the like, and determines whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot determination result is a jackpot. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure 2 jackpot determination result is a jackpot, in step S1688, in the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table selected in any of steps S1681, S1683, S1685, and S1686, Select the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the big hit, and proceed to step S1697. On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure 2 jackpot determination result is not a big hit, that is, it is a loss, in step S1689, the symbol type flag and the like are checked, and the special figure 2 losing pattern type determination result is It is determined whether or not it is a lost symbol D. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure 2 losing design type determination result is the losing design D, it performs reach determination in step S1690. The game control microcomputer 101 reads out the first stored reach random number among the reach random numbers stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b in the reach determination, and uses the reach random number as the current game state (non-time saving It is determined whether there is reach or not by referring to the reach determination table corresponding to the state/time saving state).

The game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the result of the reach determination is "with reach" in step S1691. The game control microcomputer 101, if the result of the reach determination is reach, in step S1692, in the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table selected in any of steps S1681, S1683, S1685, and S1686, the losing pattern D Select the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for reach associated with, and proceed to step S1697. On the other hand, the game control microcomputer 101 confirms the current number of special figures 2 pending in step S1693 if the result of the reach determination is that there is no reach, and selected in any of steps S1681, S1683, S1685, and S1686 In the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table, it is associated with the losing pattern D, selects the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for no reach according to the number of special figure 2 reservations, and proceeds to step S1697.

In addition, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the result of the special figure 2 losing design type determination is not the losing design D in step S1689, it checks the design type flag and the like in step S1694, and confirms the special figure 2 losing design. It is determined whether or not the result of the type determination is the missing symbol E. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the result of the special figure 2 losing pattern type determination is the losing pattern E, in step S1695, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination selected in any of steps S1681, S1683, S1685, and S1686 In the table, select the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the losing pattern E, proceed to step S1697, and determine that the result of the special figure 2 losing pattern type determination is not the losing pattern E, that is, the losing pattern F Then, in step S1696, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the losing design F is selected, and the process proceeds to step S1697.

Game control microcomputer 101 is step S1688, S1692, S1693, S1695, S1696, when the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is selected, in step S1697, special figure 2 variation based on the selected special figure 2 variation pattern determination table Perform pattern judgment. The game control microcomputer 101 reads out the first stored special figure variation pattern random number stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b in the special figure 2 variation pattern determination, and the special figure variation The special figure 2 variation pattern is determined by collating with the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table in which the pattern random number is selected.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special figure 2 variation start command indicating the special figure 2 variation pattern determined in step S1698 to the output buffer, and in step S1699, the determined special figure 2 variation pattern The corresponding special figure fluctuation time is set in the special operation timer, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination processing is terminated, and the processing is returned to the special symbol standby processing.

Next, a special symbol determination process according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 86 shows a flowchart of the special symbol determination process according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 86, the special symbol confirmation process according to the sixth embodiment is a process related to a small hit that was performed in the special symbol confirmation process according to the first embodiment. S1762-S1763 in the special symbol determination process is not performed, and when it is determined that it is not a big hit in step S1758, the process proceeds to step S1764, and in step S1764, it is determined whether or not the losing symbols E and F are stopped and displayed. Other than that, it is configured in the same manner as the special symbol determination process according to the first embodiment.

Here, the game state setting processing (S1509) after displaying the losing symbols will be described. As described above, the game control microcomputer 101 performs the game state setting process after displaying the losing symbols when the special action status is "8". The game control microcomputer 101 sets the time saving state based on the game state at that time and the type of the losing symbol in the game state setting process after displaying the losing symbol. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not the game is in a non-time saving state. Then, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is in the non-time-saving state, it confirms the lost symbol type that is stopped and displayed next. Here, when the losing pattern type is the losing pattern E, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the game state setting table for the losing symbol E associated with the non-time-saving state (game state setting for non-time-saving losing symbol E stop display table) to set the game state. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a time saving state in which the end condition is the number of executions of special figure variable display "150 times". Specifically, in order to set the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing pattern E, a time saving flag (time saving flag after displaying the losing pattern E) indicating that it is a time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing pattern E is set. A time saving flag area of a game RAM 104 is turned ON to set a time saving state, and a game state command indicating a time saving state triggered by stop display of a losing pattern E is set in an output buffer of the game RAM 104.例文帳に追加Furthermore, the microcomputer 101 for game control sets the execution frequency "150 times" of the special figure variable display which is the time saving regulation frequency to the time saving remaining frequency counter as end conditions of the time saving state. On the other hand, the game control microcomputer 101, when the losing pattern type is the losing pattern F, the game state setting table for the losing pattern F associated with the non-time-saving state (non-time-saving losing pattern F stop display game state setting table ) to set the game state. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a time-saving state in which the end condition is the number of executions of the special figure variable display "50 times". Specifically, in order to set the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing pattern F, a time saving flag (time saving flag after displaying the losing pattern F) indicating that it is a time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing pattern F is set. A time saving flag area of a game RAM 104 is turned ON to set a time saving state, and a game state command indicating a time saving state triggered by stop display of a losing pattern F is set in an output buffer of the game RAM 104.例文帳に追加Furthermore, the microcomputer 101 for game control sets the execution frequency "50 times" of the special figure variable display which is the time saving regulation frequency to the time saving remaining frequency counter as end conditions of the time saving state.

In addition, when it is determined that the game control microcomputer 101 is not in the non-time saving state, the game state is based on the game state setting table (game state setting table for time saving losing symbol stop display) for losing symbols associated with the time saving state. set. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 does not newly set the game state. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 does not set the time saving state with the stop display of the losing pattern E or the stop display of the losing pattern F as a trigger. Do not set. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 does not perform any processing on the time saving remaining number counter.

Then, the game control microcomputer 101 finally changes the special operation status to "1" even when it is determined that it is not in the non-time-saving state, and displays the lost pattern. After that, the game state setting process is terminated.

Next, a characteristic portion of the game flow of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. It should be noted that the description of the parts common to the game flow according to the first embodiment described based on FIG. 63 will be omitted. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a characteristic part of the game flow of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to the sixth embodiment. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when the game is performed in the normal game state, in other words, in the normal effect mode, the first normal effect stage, the second normal effect stage, and the third normal effect Even if the stop display of failure is executed while the performance by the stage is being executed, the time saving state is set and the performance mode is not changed. As in the first embodiment, when the jackpot symbols A and B are stopped and displayed in the normal game state, the jackpot game is executed (the game is executed in the jackpot game state), and the jackpot is executed. After the performance in the performance mode is executed, the state is shifted to the high-probability high-base game state, and the state is shifted to the variable-probability performance mode. ), and after the performance in the jackpot performance mode is executed, it shifts to a low-probability high base game state and shifts to a time-saving performance mode.

Further, as described above, in the sixth embodiment, the gate 13 is also provided on the first flow path R1 in the left game area 6A, so that the second start port 12 is won in the normal game state and the special figure It is possible to have two variable displays performed. As explained in the basic embodiment, the special figure 2 variable display is preferentially executed over the special figure 1 variable display. Therefore, for example, when the second starting port 12 is opened when the special figure 1 variable display is being executed (the auxiliary game is executed), and the second starting port 12 is won during the opening, the special figure 1 After the variable display ends, the special figure 2 variable display based on the winning to the second starting port 12 during the opening will be executed. Then, in the sixth embodiment, in response to the start of the special figure 2 variable display in the normal game state, the normal effect mode that has been set until then is shifted to the special effect mode. Although the detailed description of the effect by the special effect mode is omitted, for example, in the special effect mode, the background image dedicated to the special effect mode is displayed on the display unit 50a as in the case of the variable probability effect mode and the short time effect mode. BGM dedicated to the production mode is output from the speaker 52. - 特許庁In addition, in the special effect mode, a ready-to-win effect (SP reach, L reach) dedicated to the special effect mode and an advance notice effect are performed. In addition, the special effect mode is the last special figure 2 variable based on the winning of the second start port 12 performed during the opening of the second start port 12 that triggers the special effect mode (during the execution of the auxiliary game) It ends when the display ends. And, according to the end of the special effect mode, it returns to the normal effect mode.

When the special figure 2 variable display is performed in the normal game state and the stop display of the losing pattern E is performed while the performance in the special performance mode is being performed, the prescribed number of time reduction is 150 times according to the stop display. A time saving state using a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for a losing pattern E time saving state is set to shift to a low probability high base game state and a super chance mode. On the other hand, when the stop display of the losing pattern F is performed, the time saving prescribed number of times is 50 times according to the stop display, and the time saving state using the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the losing pattern F time saving state is set. It shifts to a low-probability high-base game state and shifts to a short chance mode.

In this way, in the normal game state (non-time saving state), as the final result display of the special figure 2 variable display, when the stop display of the losing pattern E and the losing pattern F is performed, the low probability high base game state A new low-probability high-base game state is set, and a super-chance mode and a short-chance mode are newly set. However, in the low-probability high-base game state and high-probability high-base game state (time saving state), as the final result display of the special figure 2 variable display, even if the stop display of the losing pattern E and the losing pattern F is performed, The game state and performance mode at that time continue as they are without setting a new time saving state, nor setting a new super chance mode or a short chance mode.

In addition, when the special figure 2 variable display is executed in the normal game state and the stop display of the big hit pattern F is performed while the effect in the special effect mode is being executed, the big win game state is entered in accordance with the stop display. Along with the shift, the mode shifts to a jackpot production mode. Then, in the same way as in the case of the stop display of the jackpot pattern C such as the first embodiment, when the jackpot game state based on the stop display of the jackpot pattern F is terminated, the predetermined number of times of time saving is 100 times, and the time saving state is set to 100 times. A time-saving state using a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is set, the game is shifted to a low-probability high base game state, and a time-saving performance mode is shifted. It should be noted that, when the stop display of the big win symbols D and E is performed, according to the stop display, the game state shifts to the big win game state and also shifts to the big win performance mode. Then, as in the case of the stop display of the jackpot patterns A and B such as the first embodiment, according to the end of the jackpot game state based on the stop display of the jackpot patterns D and E, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern for the jackpot time saving state A time-saving state in which a determination table is used is set to shift to a high-probability high-base game state and shift to a variable probability performance mode.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the sixth embodiment, when the stop display of the losing patterns E and F is performed in a non-time-saving state relatively disadvantageous to the player, the time-saving state according to the stop display is set, but even if the stop display of the losing patterns E and F is performed in the time saving state relatively advantageous to the player, the time saving state is newly set according to the stop display, or the time saving state ends. No terms will be extended. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in a non-time-saving state disadvantageous to the player, improve the game interest, and prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous.

(Modified example of the sixth embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. It should be noted that the modified example of the modified example of the first embodiment can also be appropriately applied to the sixth embodiment within a consistent range (a range in which consistency can be obtained). In the sixth embodiment, the special figure 2 losing pattern types that generate the time saving state are two types of losing patterns E and F, but may be three or more types. In this case, as in the sixth embodiment, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used in the time saving state may be changed according to the lost pattern type. In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the special figure 1 losing pattern type is provided only with a losing pattern that does not generate a time saving state, but like the special figure 2 losing pattern type, a losing pattern type that generates a time saving state is provided. can be In this case, in the time saving state, the same special figure 1 variation pattern determination table as any special figure 2 losing pattern type that generates a time saving state may be used, and a special figure 2 losing pattern type that generates a time saving state Different Toku-zu 1 variation pattern determination table may be used.

Also, in the sixth embodiment, the determination result of the special figure 2 big hit determination does not include a small hit, but it may be possible to include a small hit and make it possible to win a small hit even in the special figure 2 big hit determination. In this case, the time-saving state may be set with the end of the stop display of the small winning symbols as a trigger. Furthermore, in the time saving state in this case, the same special figure 2 variation pattern determination table as the time saving state triggered by the end of the stop display of the losing pattern related to special figure 2 may be used, and a different special figure 2 variation pattern determination A table may be used.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, a plurality of types of small winning symbols may be provided. In this case, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table may be changed according to the type of the small winning symbol. Further, in the sixth embodiment, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the time saving state may be generated without fail after the stopped display. Alternatively, even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the time saving state may not occur after the stopped display. That is, the small winning pattern may have a type of a small winning pattern that generates a time saving state and a type of a small winning pattern that does not generate a time saving state. Alternatively, only a small winning pattern that does not cause the time saving state may be provided.

In addition, after the winning pattern is derived as the big hit determination result by the big hit determination, instead of generating the time saving state by deriving the losing patterns E and F as the losing pattern type determination result by the losing pattern type determination, for example , Whether or not to generate a time-saving state before the jackpot determination (time-saving determination) may be performed. In this case, for example, a random number (time-saving random number) such as a jackpot random number is provided separately, and the judgment value of the time-saving random number is to generate a time-saving state and not to generate a time-saving state like a jackpot judgment. You may make it perform the time saving determination which collates with the time saving determination table distributed suitably. Then, when it is determined in the time saving determination that the time saving state is to be generated, the time saving state may be set after the stop display of the lost design. Also, in this case, if the determination result that the time reduction state is generated in the time reduction determination is derived, and if the determination result that the time reduction state is not generated is derived in the time reduction determination, even if the losing pattern is different good. Furthermore, when the determination result that the time saving state is generated in the time saving determination is derived, the type of the losing pattern is determined from a plurality of types, and the jackpot pattern type determination according to the sixth embodiment, Like the lost design type determination, depending on the type of this lost design, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table used in the time saving state and the time saving prescribed number of times (end condition) may be different.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, the time-saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern E and the time-saving state after the stopping display of the losing pattern F shift to different production modes, but the shift to the same production mode is made. You can do it. In addition, in the sixth embodiment, different times of the prescribed number of time reductions are set for the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern E and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern F, but the same number of times is set. The prescribed number of working hours may be set. Furthermore, the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern E, the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern F, and the ease of opening the second start port 12 are set to be the same, but different. May be set.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, when the special figure 2 variable display is executed in the normal game state, the effect by the special effect mode is executed, but without shifting to the special effect mode, the normal effect mode is used as it is. A production may be executed.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, a seventh embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment, the first embodiment, and the sixth embodiment according to the present invention described above. In the following, as the seventh embodiment, differences from the basic embodiment, the first embodiment, and the sixth embodiment will be mainly described. Note that the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiment, the first embodiment, and the sixth embodiment, or the configurations that correspond in the same manner. Note that the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiment, the first embodiment, and the sixth embodiment, or the configurations that correspond in the same manner.

In the seventh embodiment, the game board unit YU shown in FIG. 74 is used as in the case of the sixth embodiment. That is, the gate 13 is also provided on the first flow path R1 in the left game area 6A, and the second start port 12 is opened in the normal game state, and the winning to the second start port 12 is performed. Two variable representations may be implemented.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, as in the sixth embodiment, the time saving state is not set according to the stop display of the losing pattern according to the special figure 1, and the losing pattern relating to the special figure 2 in the non-working time saving state Although the time saving state may be set according to the stop display, unlike the case of the sixth embodiment, the remaining number of time saving states related to the time saving state according to the stop display of the missing pattern related to the special figure 2 in the time saving state It may be increased (the duration of the time saving state is extended).

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, only the losing pattern E is provided as the losing pattern type related to the special figure 2 that can set the time saving state, and the time saving state that is set according to the stop display of the losing pattern E The ease of opening the second starting port 12 (the ease of opening the second starting port 12), in particular, the time saving state components are set the same as in the sixth embodiment, but the missing pattern E Unlike the sixth embodiment, the time saving specified number of times related to the time saving state set according to the stop display is set to "100 times" for the number of executions of the special figure variable display. Also, as in the case of the sixth embodiment, when the special effect mode is set when the special figure 2 variable display is started in the non-time saving state, and the stop display of the losing pattern E is performed in the special effect mode, the second It shifts to the super chance mode described in the 6th embodiment.

Next, a losing symbol type determination table according to the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 88 shows a configuration example of the losing symbol type determination table according to the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 88, in the seventh embodiment, the special figure 2 is determined to be either the losing symbol D or the losing symbol E as the losing symbol type in the losing symbol type determination. Basically, this lost pattern D corresponds to the lost pattern D of the sixth embodiment, and is a lost pattern that cannot generate a time saving state, and this lost pattern E is the lost pattern E of the sixth embodiment. It corresponds to the pattern E, and is a lost pattern that can generate a time-saving state. Incidentally, the jackpot determination table and the jackpot symbol type determination table are the same as those in the sixth embodiment.

Next, a special figure variation pattern determination table according to the seventh embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the special figure 2 variation pattern is different in the time of the non-time saving state, the time of the time saving state after the jackpot game, and the time of the time saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern E. A 2-fluctuation pattern determination table is used. In other words, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is associated with the opportunity of the time saving state in addition to the game state related to the ease of opening the second start port 12, and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table includes a non-time saving state Special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the time saving state after the jackpot gaming state (Special figure 2 variation pattern decision table for the big hit time saving state) and after the losing pattern E stop display There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for time saving state (loss pattern E special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for time saving state).

89 to 90 show a configuration example of a special figure variation pattern determination table according to the seventh embodiment. Figure 89 (A) is a configuration example of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state, Figure 89 (B) is a configuration example of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the jackpot time saving state, Figure 90 is a configuration example of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the lost pattern E time saving state. The special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving state of FIG. 89 (A) corresponds to the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving state according to the sixth embodiment (FIG. The special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the jackpot time saving state of 89 (B) corresponds to the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (Fig. 77 (B)) for the jackpot time saving state according to the sixth embodiment, Fig. 90 The special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the losing design E time saving state corresponds to the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the losing design E time saving state (FIG. 78(A)) according to the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 89(A), 89(B), and 90, each special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is not provided with a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the losing design F. This is because, as described above, in the seventh embodiment, the "losing symbol F" is not provided as the determination result of the failing symbol type determination. In addition, each special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is configured in the same manner as in the sixth embodiment except that the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the losing pattern F is not provided.

Next, the game state setting table for newly setting (changing) the game state will be described. When the game state is newly set (changed) in response to the end of the jackpot game state, the game state is set based on the game state setting table shown in FIG. A state is set, and an end condition for the game state is set. When the game state is newly set (changed) according to the stop display of the losing symbols, the game state is basically newly set (changed) based on the game state setting table.

In the game state setting table (game state setting table for the stop display of the losing pattern) when the game state is newly set (changed) according to the stop display of the losing pattern, the stop display of the losing pattern is performed in the non-time saving state. A game state setting table for the stop display of losing symbols when it is broken (a game state setting table for the stop display of non-time-saving losing symbols) and a losing design stop when the stop display of the losing symbols is performed in the low-probability high-base game state. There is a game state setting table for display (game state setting table for low-probability short-time loss symbol stop display). FIG. 91(A) is a configuration example of a game state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol stop display, and FIG. 91(B) is a configuration example of a game state setting table for low-probability time-saving losing symbol stop display. That is, the game state is associated with the game state setting table related to the stop display of the losing symbols.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, unlike the sixth embodiment, a plurality of losing symbol types are not provided, so the game state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol stop display and the game state setting table for low-probability time-saving losing symbol stop display , is not associated with a losing pattern type, but is associated with a big hit determination result of a losing pattern (losing).

In addition, when the time saving state is set using the game state setting table for non-time saving losing symbol stop display, that is, the time saving state is set according to the stop display of the losing symbol E in the non time saving state. In this case, the end condition of the time saving state is set to "80 special variable display". On the other hand, when the time saving state is set using the game state setting table for the low probability time saving losing pattern stop display, that is, the time saving state in response to the stop display of the losing pattern E in the low probability high base game state is set, the end condition of the time saving state is set to "special figure variable display 40 times". In addition, as will be described later, in the low-probability high-base gaming state, a time-saving state is set, and in the low-probability high-base gaming state, the stop display of the losing pattern E is performed. Once returned to the non-time-saving state. Since there is no such thing, strictly speaking, the time saving state is not newly set in response to the stop display of the losing pattern E in the low probability high base game state, and the time saving state continues. , As will be described later, the remaining number of times of time saving related to the time saving state may increase, that is, the duration of the time saving state may be extended. Therefore, for the sake of convenience, the increase in the number of remaining time reductions related to this time reduction state (extension of the duration of the time reduction state) is also positioned as "setting of the time reduction state", and the increased number of remaining time reductions (execution number of special variable display) is positioned as "time-saving prescribed number of times".

Next, a process performed by the game control microcomputer 101, which differs from that of the sixth embodiment, will be described. The processing different from the sixth embodiment is the special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing, the special design determination processing, and the game state setting processing after display of the losing design.

First, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing according to the seventh embodiment will be described. A flowchart of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process according to the seventh embodiment is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 92, the game control microcomputer 101, in the special figure 2 pattern determination process, first, as step S1680, whether the game state related to the ease of opening the second start port 12 is currently a non-time saving state determine whether or not When it determines with the microcomputer 101 for game control being non-time saving state, in step S1681, it will select the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for non-time-saving state, and will progress to step S1685.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is not a non-time saving state in step S1680, that is, it is a time saving state, in step S1682, the type of the time saving flag described later is confirmed, and the time saving state is time saving after the jackpot game. state. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the time saving state is the time saving state after the jackpot game, in step S1683, selects the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the jackpot time saving state, and proceeds to step S1685.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1682 that it is not the time saving state after the jackpot game state, in step S1684, selects the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the losing symbol E time saving state, and proceeds to step S1685. move on.

In step S1685, the game control microcomputer 101 checks the symbol type flag and the like, and determines whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot determination result is a jackpot. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure 2 jackpot determination result is a jackpot, in step S1686, in the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table selected in any of steps S1681, S1683, and S1684, the jackpot Select the associated special figure 2 variation pattern determination table, and proceed to step S1693. On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure 2 jackpot determination result is not a big hit, that is, a loss, in step S1687, the symbol type flag and the like are checked, and the special figure 2 losing symbol type determination result is It is determined whether or not it is a lost symbol D. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure 2 losing design type determination result is the losing design D, it performs reach determination in step S1688. The game control microcomputer 101 reads out the first stored reach random number among the reach random numbers stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b in the reach determination, and uses the reach random number as the current game state (non-time saving It is determined whether there is reach or not by referring to the reach determination table corresponding to the state/time saving state).

The game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the result of the reach determination is "with reach" in step S1689. Game control microcomputer 101, if the result of the reach determination is reach, in step S1690, in the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1681, S1683, S1684, associated with the losing pattern D Select the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the reach available, and proceed to step S1693. On the other hand, the game control microcomputer 101, if the result of the reach determination is not reach, in step S1691, confirms the current number of special figures 2 reserved, and special figures selected in any of steps S1681, S1683, and S1684 In the 2 variation pattern determination table, it is associated with the losing pattern D, selects the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for no reach according to the number of special figure 2 reservations, and proceeds to step S1693.

In addition, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the result of the special figure 2 losing design type determination is not the losing design D in step S1687, in step S1692, the special figure selected in any of steps S1681, S1683, and S1684 Select the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table associated with the losing design E in the 2 variation pattern determination table, and proceed to step S1693.

Game control microcomputer 101, in steps S1686, S1690, S1691, S1692, when selecting the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table, in step S1693, special figure 2 variation pattern determination based on the selected special figure 2 variation pattern determination table I do. The game control microcomputer 101 reads out the first stored special figure variation pattern random number stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b in the special figure 2 variation pattern determination, and the special figure variation The special figure 2 variation pattern is determined by collating with the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table in which the pattern random number is selected.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101, in step S1694, sets the special figure 2 variation start command indicating the determined special figure 2 variation pattern to the output buffer, and in step S1695, the determined special figure 2 variation pattern The corresponding special figure fluctuation time is set in the special operation timer, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination processing is terminated, and the processing is returned to the special symbol standby processing.

Next, a special symbol determination process according to the seventh embodiment will be described. The special symbol confirmation process according to the seventh embodiment is almost the same as the special symbol confirmation process according to the sixth embodiment. The difference is that in the sixth embodiment, in step S1764 shown in FIG. 86, it is determined whether or not the special symbol currently stopped and displayed is the losing symbol E or the losing symbol F, but in the seventh embodiment. Now, since there is no lost symbol F, it is determined whether or not the currently stopped special symbol is the lost symbol E. Therefore, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is the losing pattern E, in step S1766, it changes the special action status to "8" and terminates the special symbol confirmation process. When determined, in step S1765, the special action status is changed to "1", and the special symbol confirmation process is terminated.

Subsequently, the game state setting processing (S1509) after display of losing symbols according to the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 shows a flowchart of the game state setting process after display of losing symbols according to the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93, the game control microcomputer 101, in the game state setting processing after displaying the losing symbols, first, as step S1801, the game state related to the opening easiness of the second start port 12 is currently in a non-time saving state. Determine whether or not there is When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is in the non-time-saving state, in step S1802, it selects the game state setting table for non-time-saving loss symbol stop display, and proceeds to step S1805.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1801 that it is not a non-time-saving state, that is, it is a time-saving state, in step S1803, it determines whether or not the game state related to the jackpot determination probability is a normal probability state. When determining that the game control microcomputer 101 is in the normal probability state, in step S1804, it selects the game state setting table for low-probability time-saving loss symbol stop display, and proceeds to step S1805. On the other hand, if the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is not in the normal probability state, the process proceeds to step S1809.

The game control microcomputer 101 sets the time saving state in step S1805 according to the game state setting table selected in step S1802 or step S1804. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 selects the game state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol stop display, a time-saving flag indicating that it is a time-saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol E (Working time saving flag after display of losing pattern E) is turned ON in the working time saving flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the working time saving state, and the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing pattern E in the non working time saving state is shown. A state command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 . On the other hand, the game control microcomputer 101 selects the game state setting table for low-probability time-saving losing symbol stop display, the time-saving flag (loss) indicating the time-saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol E The time saving flag after displaying the pattern E) is turned on in the time saving flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the time saving state, and the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing pattern E in the low probability high base game state is indicated. A game state command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 .

Subsequently, in step S1806, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the time saving prescribed number of times according to the game state setting table selected in step S1802 or step S1804, that is, the time saving prescribed number of times associated with the losing pattern in the current game state. Add to the continuous time reduction counter. The continuous time reduction counter counts the number of continuous time reductions and is provided in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104 . Here, the number of consecutive time reductions will be described.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, even if the stop display of the losing pattern E is performed in the low probability high base game state, the time saving state has already been set, and the non-time saving state once like before the execution of the jackpot game Since it is not returned to (reset), substantially, the time saving state continues as it is without changing the game state related to the ease of opening the second start port 12 . Then, when the stop display of the losing pattern E is performed in the low-probability high-base game state, not only does the time-saving state continue, but also the number of remaining time-savings increases by the specified number of times of time-saving associated with the losing pattern. do. That is, the remaining number of times of time saving is added (the duration of the time saving state is extended).

In this way, when the stop display of the losing pattern E is performed in the low-probability high-base game state, the remaining number of time-savings is added (the duration of the time-saving state is extended), but the time-saving state is continuously executed once. The number of times of possible special figure variable display, the upper limit is provided. And, the number of times of the special figure variable display that can be executed continuously is called "continuous time saving number of times", and the upper limit is called "time saving limiter number of times". Therefore, in the non-time-saving state, if the stop display of the losing pattern E is performed, the time-saving state is newly set, but the first time-saving remaining number of times related to this time-saving state is the losing pattern in the non-time-saving state. It becomes "80 times" which is the prescribed number of times of shortening of working hours according to the stop display of E, and this "80 times" becomes the first number of times of shortening of working hours.

Then, when the stop display of the losing pattern E is performed in the time saving state (low-probability high-base gaming state), the time-saving specified number of times according to the stop display of the losing pattern E in the low-probability high-base gaming state is "40 times". is added, the number of times of continuous time reduction is "120 times". In addition, until the stop display of the losing pattern E in the time saving state is performed, for example, if the special figure variable display is executed 20 times, the remaining number of time saving at that time is 60 times (80 times -20 times). Therefore, if "40 times" is added, the remaining number of times of time saving will be 100 times, but where the time saving state could be continued until the special figure variable display was originally executed 80 times, "40 times" times”, so the number of executions of the special figure variable display that can be continuously executed in the time saving state, including the minutes that have already been executed, is 120 times (80 times + 40 times). Become.

The description returns to the game state setting process after displaying the lost symbols. In step S1807, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the number of times of continuous time reduction is equal to or less than the number of times of time reduction limiter (200 times). When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the number of times of continuous time saving is equal to or less than the number of times of time saving limiter (200 times), in step S1808, the current game state (non-time saving state / low probability high base game state) corresponds to the lost pattern The attached time saving prescribed number of times is added to the counter value of the time saving remaining number counter, and in step S1809, the special action status is changed to "1", and the game state setting processing is ended after the losing pattern display.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the number of continuous time reduction is not less than the time reduction limiter number of times (200 times), that is, when it is determined that the number of continuous time reduction exceeds the time reduction limiter number of times, the special operation status is set to "1" as it is in step S1809. After changing, the game state setting process is terminated after displaying the lost symbol.

Next, a characteristic portion of the game flow of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. Descriptions of the parts common to the game flow according to the first embodiment explained based on FIG. 63 and the parts common to the game flow according to the sixth embodiment explained based on FIG. 87 will be omitted. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a characteristic part of the game flow of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to the seventh embodiment. In addition, as described above, in the seventh embodiment, in response to the start of the special figure 2 variable display in the normal game state, the normal effect mode that has been set until then is shifted to the special effect mode. The content of the effect in the special effect mode is the same as in the sixth embodiment.

When the special figure 2 variable display is performed in the normal game state and the stop display of the losing pattern E is performed while the performance in the special performance mode is being performed, the prescribed number of times of shortening the time is 80 times according to the stop display. A time saving state using a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for a losing pattern E time saving state is set to shift to a low probability high base game state and a super chance mode. Then, when the game is executed in the low probability high base game state and the effect is executed in the super chance mode, the stop display of the losing pattern E is displayed as the final result display of the special figure 2 variable display. When performed, the low-probability high-base game state and the super-chance mode are maintained, and the number of consecutive time reductions does not exceed the time-saving limiter. The remaining number of times of shortening is added for the specified number of times of shortening (40 times) attached. After that, when the game is executed in the low-probability high-base game state and the performance is executed in the super-chance mode time-saving performance mode, when the stop display of the losing pattern E is performed, the number of times of continuous time-saving is a time-saving limiter. Until the number of times is reached, while the low-probability high-base game state and the super-chance mode are maintained, the time-saving specified number of times (40 times) associated with the stop display of the losing pattern E in the low-probability high-base game state, The number of remaining time reductions is added. On the other hand, when the game is executed in the low probability high base game state, and the production is executed in the super chance mode short working hours production mode, as the final result display of the special figure 2 variable display, the losing pattern E Even if the stop display is performed, the number of continuous time reductions added with the remaining number of time reductions for the prescribed number of time reductions (40 times) associated with the stop display of the losing pattern E in the low-probability high base game state is the number of time reduction limiter times. If it exceeds, the low probability high base game state and the super chance mode are maintained, but the remaining number of time reduction is not added.

In addition, the prescribed number of time reductions associated with the stop display of the losing symbol E in the low probability low base gaming state is 80 times, and the prescribed number of time reductions associated with the stop display of the losing symbol E in the low probability high base gaming state. is 40 times, and the number of times of the time saving limiter is 200 times, so in the low probability high base game state according to the stop display of the losing pattern E in the low probability low base game state, the stop display of the losing pattern E is performed three times. If you do, the number of consecutive time saving will reach the time saving limiter number of times. That is, it is possible to add up to 3 times the remaining number of times of shortening of the number of times of execution of the special figure variable display "40 times".

In addition, the jackpot pattern C is stopped in the special figure 1 variable display, or the jackpot pattern F is stopped in the special figure 2 variable display, the jackpot game is executed, and the jackpot game ends. Then, when the game is shifted to the low-probability high-base game state and shifted to the short-time production mode, the game is executed in the low-probability high-base game state and the production is executed in the super-chance mode. Then, when the stop display of the losing pattern E is performed, the low-probability high-base game state is maintained while the low-probability high-base game state and the time-saving performance mode are maintained within the range where the number of times of continuous time-saving does not exceed the number of times of the time-saving limiter. The remaining number of times of shortening is added for the specified number of times of shortening (40 times) associated with the stop display of the losing pattern E in . However, since the prescribed number of time reductions associated with the time saving state related to the big winning pattern C and the big winning pattern F is 120 times, and the number of times of the time saving limiter is 200 times, the big winning game related to the big winning pattern C and the big winning pattern F ends. In the low-probability high-base game state corresponding to , when the stop display of the losing pattern E is performed twice, the number of times of continuous time reduction reaches the number of times of the time reduction limiter. That is, it is possible to add the remaining number of times of shortening of the execution number of times "40 times" of the special figure variable display up to 2 times.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the game is executed in the high-probability high-base game state which is more advantageous to the player than the low-probability low-base game state and the low-probability high-base game state, and the effect is executed in the probability variable production mode. Even if the stop display of the losing pattern E is performed when the game is on, the number of remaining times of time reduction is not added.

Next, the production|presentation which concerns on addition of the time saving remaining frequency|count is demonstrated. In 7th Embodiment, the production|presentation which concerns on addition of the remaining number of times of time saving is performed in the display part 50a. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing how an effect related to adding the remaining number of times of reducing time is executed on the display unit 50a. Here, the production|presentation which concerns on addition of the time-saving remaining frequency|count performed in super chance mode is demonstrated.

For example, as shown in FIG. 95(A), the super chance mode background image G140 is displayed on the display unit 50a in the super chance mode, and the special figure variation effect (the effect pattern EZ1 to EZ3 Variable display) is executed, the remaining number of times of time saving is 51 times, and the remaining number of times of saving time image G31 indicating that the remaining number of times of saving time is 51 times is displayed. And, it is assumed that the stop display of the losing pattern E is executed in the special figure 2 variable display. Then, as shown in FIG. 95(B), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a failure. Subsequently, in response to the start of the next special figure 2 variable display after the special figure determination time has elapsed since the stop display of the losing pattern E is executed, the variable display of the new production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started. However, after the special figure confirmation time has passed, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits a game state command indicating that it is a time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing pattern E in the low probability high base game state. 95 (C ), an image (remaining time saving frequency added image) G34 suggesting that the remaining time saving frequency is added is displayed on the display unit 50a. The time saving remaining number of times addition image G34 is composed of an image including a character indicating that the remaining time saving number of times is added (added) 40 times "+40 times".

Immediately after the image G34 of the remaining number of times of shortening is displayed, the display content of the remaining number of times of shortening is changed according to the number of remaining times of shortening being added, as shown in FIG. 95(D). Specifically, since the number of times of remaining time saving is added 40 times and the number of times of remaining time saving has become 91 times, the number part related to the remaining number of times of time saving image G31 becomes "91". Then, immediately after that, in response to the start of the new special figure 2 variable display, as shown in FIG. becomes. In this way, the image G34 with the remaining number of times shortened is displayed, and the display content of the remaining number of times shortened image G31 changes in response to the addition of the remaining number of times shortened. do. In addition, below, the production|presentation which concerns on addition of the remaining number of times of time saving is called "production of the number of remaining time saving additions."

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the seventh embodiment, when the stop display of the losing pattern E is performed in the non-time saving state (low probability low base game state), the time saving state is set according to the stop display Further, when the stop display of the losing pattern E is performed in the low-probability high-base game state, the remaining number of times of time reduction related to the time reduction state is added according to the stop display, and the continuation period of the time reduction state is extended. Therefore, even if it is not possible to win a big hit in the time-saving state, the player is expected to have an advantage of ``adding the number of remaining time-savings (extension of the duration of the time-saving state)'', and the game is interesting. can be improved.

In addition, for the same losing pattern E, the prescribed number of time saving related to the time saving state according to the stop display of the losing pattern E in the non-time saving state (low probability low base game state) is 80 times, and the time saving state (low probability The prescribed number of time reductions related to the time reduction state according to the stop display of the losing pattern E in the high base game state) is 40 times, and the prescribed number of time reductions varies depending on the game state. Therefore, the overall playability is sharpened, and the interest in the game is improved.

Furthermore, when the stop display of the losing pattern E is executed in the time saving state, the remaining number of time saving may be added, but since the time saving limiter number is provided as the upper limit value of the number of continuous time saving, the player is excessively You can prevent it from becoming profitable. In addition, since the number of times of the time saving limiter is set to be larger than the prescribed number of times of time saving in the low-probability high base game state set according to the end of the jackpot game, although the jackpot game is not executed, the player can be prevented from losing. It is possible to give joy to the shift to the time-saving state according to the stop display of the pattern E.

(Modified example of the seventh embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. It should be noted that modifications of the first embodiment, the sixth embodiment, and the like can also be appropriately applied to the seventh embodiment as long as there is no contradiction (a range in which consistency can be obtained). In the seventh embodiment, the special figure 2 losing design type that generates the time saving state is one type of losing design E, but may be two or more types. In this case, the number of times of shortening of working hours specified, in other words, the number of times of execution of the special figure variable display to be added may be different according to the lost design type.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, even in the low-probability high-base game state set according to the end of the jackpot games related to the jackpot patterns C and F, when the losing pattern E is stopped and displayed, the number of remaining time reductions is added. However, in the game state, even if the stop display of the losing symbol E is performed, it may be regulated so that the remaining number of times of shortening is not added. Alternatively, the low-probability high base game state set according to the end of the jackpot game related to the jackpot patterns C and F is set according to the stop display of the losing pattern E, instead of regulating the remaining number of time reductions so as not to be added. It may be regulated so that the number of executions of the special figure variable display added to the low probability high base game state set by is reduced.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, the high-probability high-base game state set according to the end of the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbols A, B, D, and E is not provided with the time-saving prescribed number of times, and the game state , even if the stop display of the losing pattern E is performed, the remaining number of times of shortening is not added, but the number of times of saving time is provided for the game state, and the stop display of the losing pattern E is performed in the game state. When it is done, the remaining number of times of time saving may be added. In this case, the number of executions of the special figure variable display added by one stop display of the losing symbol E is higher than in the case of the low probability high base game state set according to the stop display of the losing symbol E. You can make it less.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, when the remaining number of times of shortening is added, when the stop display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 is to be switched to the variable display, the remaining number of times of shortening is added, and the feature to be added A time-saving remaining number-of-times-addition effect that suggests the number of executions of the variable diagram display is executed, but the specific contents of the effect and the execution timing may be changed as appropriate. In addition, for example, in the special figure fluctuation production, it is possible to perform a production that suggests that the number of remaining times of shortening may be added, in other words, an effect that incites whether or not the number of remaining times of shortening is added. In this case, for example, in the special figure fluctuation production related to the losing pattern E, a production is executed to incite whether or not the remaining number of time reductions is added, and finally the number of remaining time reductions is added in the production, and the addition Suggests the number of executions of special figure variable display. On the other hand, in the special figure variation performance related to the loss that corresponds to the special figure variation performance related to the losing pattern E, the production that incites whether the number of times of the remaining time reduction is added is executed, and finally the time reduction remaining in the production Suggests that the number of times is not superimposed.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the ease of opening (easy to open) of the second start port 12 related to the time saving state set according to the stop display of the losing pattern E in the non-time saving state (low probability low base game state) ) and the ease of opening the second start port 12 related to the time saving state (after adding the remaining number of time saving times) set according to the stop display of the losing pattern E in the time saving state (low probability high base game state) ( easiness of opening) are the same, but may be different. For example, the opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game related to the time saving state set according to the stop display of the losing pattern E in the non-time saving state (low probability low base game state) is 3.0 seconds, and the normal While the figure fluctuation time is 10.0 seconds and the winning probability is 30000/65536, the opening time of the second start port 12 in the auxiliary game related to the time saving state (low probability high base game state) is 5.0 seconds It is set according to the stop display of the losing pattern E in the short time state (low probability high base game state) so that the normal pattern fluctuation time is 5.0 seconds and the winning probability is 59936/65536. The opening easiness (ease of opening) of the second starting port 12 related to the time saving state relates to the time saving state set according to the stop display of the losing pattern E in the non-time saving state (low probability low base game state) It may be made higher than the opening easiness (easiness of opening) of the second starting port 12 . By doing so, the overall playability is sharpened, and the amusement of the game is improved.

<Eighth Embodiment>
Next, an eighth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment and the first embodiment according to the present invention described above. In the eighth embodiment, the game board unit YU shown in FIG. 2 is used as in the first embodiment. That is, basically, the second starting port 12 is opened in the normal game state, the winning to the second starting port 12 is performed, and the special figure 2 variable display is not executed. In the following, as the eighth embodiment, mainly the basic embodiment and the points different from the first embodiment will be described. Also, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the basic embodiment and the same configuration as the first embodiment, or for the configuration similarly corresponding to that of the first embodiment.

In the eighth embodiment, as in the case of the first embodiment, "small hit" is provided as the determination result of the special figure 1 jackpot determination, and when the stop display of the small hit pattern is performed, the stop display A time saving state may be set accordingly. However, in the eighth embodiment, two types of small winning symbol types are provided, and when one of the small winning symbols is stopped and displayed, a time saving state is set according to the stopped display, as in the first embodiment. Immediately after that, the small winning game is executed, but when the other small winning pattern is stopped and displayed, the small winning game is first executed according to the stop display, and then the time saving state according to the end of the small winning game. is set.

In the eighth embodiment, a small winning symbol A and a small winning symbol B are provided as the small winning symbol types. Therefore, as in the case of a big hit or a loss, when the result of the big hit determination is a small hit, the special figure 1 small hit design type determination for determining the small hit design type is performed. The special figure 1 small hit symbol type determination is performed by the game control microcomputer 101 . The game control microcomputer 101 performs a losing symbol type determination based on a small hit symbol type determination table.

FIG. 96 shows a configuration example of the small hit symbol type determination table. The small winning symbol type determination table is configured in the same manner as the big winning symbol type determination table and the losing symbol type determination table. Specifically, the small hit design type determination table, so that the selection rate for each small hit design type shown in FIG. are distributed appropriately.

Next, a process performed by the game control microcomputer 101, which differs from that of the first embodiment, will be described. The processing different from the first embodiment is the special action processing, the special symbol 1 determination processing of the special symbol waiting processing in the special operation processing, and the special symbol determination processing in the special operation processing.

First, the special figure 1 determination processing according to the eighth embodiment will be described. A flowchart of special figure 1 determination processing according to the eighth embodiment is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 97, in the special figure 1 determination process according to the eighth embodiment, in step S1630, if it is determined that it is a small hit, as in the case of a big hit or loss, in step S1631, special figure 1 small per The symbol type determination table is selected, and in step S1632, special figure 1 small per symbol type determination is performed.

The game control microcomputer 101 reads out the first stored symbol type random number stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a in the special figure 1 small per symbol type determination, and reads out the special figure 1 small. The winning symbol type determination table is collated to determine which small winning symbol type it is. When the special figure 1 small winning symbol type determination is performed, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a symbol type flag indicating the small winning symbol type that is the determination result in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104 in step S1633, and step S1634. , set the symbol designation command indicating the small hit symbol type, which is the determination result, to the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104, finish the special figure 1 determination process, and return the process to the special symbol standby process.

In addition, part of the step numbers in the special figure 1 determination process shown in FIG. 97 differs from the step numbers in the special figure 1 determination process according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. As for the process other than the process after it is determined to be a small hit in step S1630, it is the same as the first embodiment.

Next, a special symbol determination process according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 98 shows a flowchart of the special symbol determination process according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 98, in the special symbol confirmation process according to the eighth embodiment, when it is determined that the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in step S1762, in step S1763, the type of the small winning symbol that is stopped and displayed determines whether or not it is a small winning symbol A. Here, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is a small winning pattern A, it changes the special operation status to "6" in step S1764, and ends the special design confirmation process. That is, when it is determined that it is a small hit symbol B, the special operation status is changed to "9" in step S1765, and the special symbol determination process is finished. As will be described later, in the case of the special operation status "6", the process for setting the time saving state according to the stop display of the small winning symbol is performed, while in the case of the special operation status "9", the small A process for executing a small winning game is performed according to the stop display of winning symbols.

It should be noted that part of the step numbers in the special symbol determination process shown in FIG. 98 differs from the step numbers in the special symbol determination process according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. The processing other than the processing after it is determined that the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in step S1762 is the same as that of the first embodiment.

Next, special action processing according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 shows a flowchart of special action processing according to the eighth embodiment. In the special action processing according to the eighth embodiment, the processing relating to the special figure indicator 81, the special figure reservation indicator 83 and the big winning device 14D is divided into 10 statuses (steps). A "special action status=1 to 10" is assigned to each of these statuses. As shown in FIG. 99, the special action process according to the eighth embodiment is the game state setting process after the first small winning symbol display of the special action status=6 which was not included in the special action status in the first embodiment. (S1507), and the first small per game control processing of special operation status = 7 (S1508), and the second small per game control processing of special operation status = 9 (S1510), and the second small of special operation status = 10 A game state setting process (S1511) is included after winning symbol display.

In the game state setting process (S1507) after displaying the first small winning symbol and the first small winning game control process (S1508), the game state setting process (S1507) after displaying the small winning symbol of the first embodiment and the small winning game control process The same processing as (S1508) is performed. That is, in the eighth embodiment, the names of the game state setting process (S1507) and the small hit game control process (S1508) of the first embodiment are "game state setting process after the first small hit symbol display ( S1507)” and “first small winning game control process (S1508)”.

In the second small winning game control process (S1510) and the game state setting process after the second small winning design display (S1511), basically, the small winning game control process (S1508) of the first embodiment and the small winning design display The same processing as the post-game state setting processing (S1507) is performed, but at the end of the second small winning game control processing (S1510), the special operation status is changed to "10" to end the second small winning game control processing. At the end of the second small winning symbol display game state setting process (S1511), the special action status is changed to "1" to finish the second small winning symbol display game state setting process. Small hit game control processing (S1508) and game state setting processing after small hit design display (S1507) and processing contents differ.

In the eighth embodiment, the small winning game when the small winning symbol A is stopped and displayed and the small winning game when the small winning symbol B is stopped and displayed are the same. That is, a small winning game component related to the small winning game when the small winning symbol A is stopped and displayed, and a small winning game component related to the small winning game when the small winning symbol B is stopped and displayed and are the same. Further, the time saving state when the small winning symbol A is stopped and displayed and the time saving state when the small winning symbol B is stopped and displayed are the same. That is, the time saving state component related to the time saving state when the stop display of the small winning design A is performed and the time saving state component related to the time saving state when the small winning design B is stopped and displayed are also the same is.

Next, a variable display of the small winning symbol B and an effect when a small winning game related to the small winning symbol B is executed will be described. In the eighth embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, a challenge effect is executed when the small winning symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and when the stop display of the small winning symbols ends, a super chance mode.

FIG. 100(A) is directed in a manner suggesting that the challenge rendering is completed on the display section 50a in the normal rendering mode, and that the small win and the losing pattern B are suggested, and that the super-chance mode is set. Fig. 100(B) is a diagram showing how the stop display of the symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is executed, and Fig. 100(B) is a diagram showing how the normal production mode is shifted to the super chance mode in response to the start of the small winning game. 100(C) is a diagram showing a state immediately before the special figure fluctuation effect by the super chance mode is started, and FIG. 100(D) is a diagram showing a situation where the special figure fluctuation effect by the super chance mode is performed be.

As shown in FIG. 100 (A), when the special figure fluctuation display related to the small winning pattern B is completed while the challenge production is being executed in the special figure fluctuation production, the small winning and the losing of the losing pattern B are suggested. At the same time, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner suggesting that the super chance mode is set. That is, a left super chance mode suggestive image G32a, a middle super chance mode suggestive image G32b, and a right super chance mode suggestive image G32c are displayed. Subsequently, at the timing when the small winning game is started, as shown in FIG. 100(B), a left super-chance mode suggesting image G32a, a middle super-chance mode suggesting image G32b, and a right super-chance mode suggesting image G32c are displayed. As it is, the background image G116 for challenge effect is switched to the background image G140 for super chance mode, and the right-handed image G30 is displayed.

Then, the time saving state is set according to the end of the small winning game, and it shifts to the low probability high base game state, but here, as shown in FIG. , a time saving remaining number image G31 related to the time saving state is displayed. Subsequently, when the first special figure variable display is started in the super chance mode, as shown in FIG. The remaining number of times of reduced time indicated is reduced by "1".

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment, it is difficult to acquire prize balls compared to the big winning game, and the small winning game that cannot generate the high probability state ends. Accordingly, the time-saving state is brought about, so that the player can have a sense of anticipation for the stop display of the small-win pattern, and the amusement of the game is improved. In addition, a plurality of types of small winning symbols are provided, and when the small winning symbol B is stopped and displayed, a small winning game is first executed, and a time saving state is set according to the completion of the small winning game. On the other hand, when the small hit symbol A is stopped and displayed, a time saving state is set according to the stop display, and the small winning game is executed immediately after the time saving state is set. That is, in the case of the small winning pattern A, the game is executed in a time-saving state even during the small winning game, whereas in the case of the small winning pattern B, the game is executed in a non-time-saving state during the small winning game. . Since the big winning opening 14 is opened in the small winning game, the second start opening 12 can be opened by winning the gate 13 when the player hits to the right when the small winning game is executed. Here, in the case of the small winning pattern A, since the game is executed in a time saving state even during the small winning game, it is easier to generate the special figure 2 reservation than in the case of the small winning pattern B, which is advantageous for the player. . In this way, when the stop display of the small winning pattern is performed, the next special figure 2 variable display is performed after the small winning game is executed after that, but the special figure 2 during the small winning game depending on the small winning symbol type Since the easiness of occurrence of holding is different, the player can be made to pay attention to the small winning symbol type, and the game interest is improved.

(Modified example of the eighth embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment, the special figure 1 small winning pattern types that generate the time saving state are two types of small winning patterns A and B, but may be three or more types. In addition, not only the special figure 1 small per pattern type that generates the time saving state, but also the special figure 1 small per pattern type that does not generate the time saving state may be provided. In this case, when the stop display of the special figure 1 small winning pattern that does not generate the time saving state is executed, and the small winning game corresponding to the small winning pattern is executed, the game state is not changed at all, The game state when the winning symbols are stopped is continued during the small winning game and after the small winning game. Therefore, for example, when the stop display of the special figure 1 small hit pattern that does not generate the time saving state in the non-time saving state is executed, during the small hitting game according to the small hitting pattern, and after the small hitting game, The non-time-saving state at the time of the stop display continues as it is. In addition, when the stop display of the special figure 1 small winning pattern that does not generate the time saving state in the time saving state is executed, the stop display is performed during the small winning game according to the small winning pattern and after the small winning game. The time-saving state continues as it is. In addition, the special figure 1 small winning pattern that generates the time saving state and the special figure 1 small winning pattern that does not generate the time saving state do not affect the game state related to the jackpot winning probability. That is, when the stop display of the special figure 1 small winning pattern that generates the time saving state is executed in the normal probability state, during the small winning game according to the small winning pattern and after the small winning game, the The normal probability state at the time of stop display continues as it is. Also, in the normal probability state, when the stop display of the special figure 1 small winning pattern that does not generate the time saving state is executed, during the small winning game according to the small winning pattern and after the small winning game, the The normal probability state at the time of stop display continues as it is. On the other hand, in a high probability state, when the stop display of the special figure 1 small winning pattern that generates the time saving state is executed, during the small winning game according to the small winning pattern and after the small winning game, the The high probability state at the time of stop display continues as it is. Also, in a high probability state, when the stop display of the special figure 1 small winning pattern that does not generate the time saving state is executed, during the small winning game according to the small winning pattern and after the small winning game, the The high probability state at the time of stop display continues as it is.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the small winning game of the small winning pattern A and the small winning game of the small winning pattern B are configured identically, but may be configured to be different. Furthermore, the time saving state related to the small winning pattern A and the time saving state related to the small winning pattern B are configured the same, but the ease of opening the second start port 12 (ease of opening: in the auxiliary game The opening time of the second starting port 12, the normal pattern fluctuation time, the probability of winning) and the prescribed number of times of shortening of working hours may be configured to be different.

Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, the time saving state set after the small winning game or before the small winning game and the time saving state set after the big winning game are about the ease of opening the second start port 12 Although it is configured the same, that is, the time saving state component related to the time saving state set after the small winning game or before the small winning game, and the time saving state component related to the time saving state set after the big winning game are the same but may be configured differently.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, even when the small winning symbol A is stopped and displayed, even when the small winning symbol B is stopped and displayed, the same challenge effect is performed and the same left over chance is performed. A mode suggesting image G32a, a medium super chance mode suggesting image G32b, and a right super chance mode suggesting image G32c are displayed, but when the small winning symbol A is stopped and displayed, the small winning symbol B is stopped. It is also possible to make it possible to easily determine which kind of small winning symbol type by making the production mode (color, size, or display position) of these productions different between the cases. In addition, when the small winning pattern A is stopped and displayed, and when the small winning pattern B is stopped and displayed, the performance contents during the small winning game are made different to facilitate which of the small winning pattern types. You may enable it to discriminate|determine.

7. Other Modifications Next, other modifications of the basic embodiment and the pachinko game machine PY1 according to the first embodiment will be described below. Hereinafter, the basic embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first to eighth embodiments will be referred to as "pachinko gaming machine PY1, etc.".

In the pachinko game machine PY1 or the like, the display unit 50a is used to variably display the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in order to notify the result of the special drawing lottery. (Slot machine)”, a special figure lottery result may be notified by arranging a drum on which a pattern is displayed and by variably displaying the drum. In addition, in the pachinko game machine PY1 or the like, the big winning opening 14 can be opened in the big winning game, but other than the big winning opening 14, a winning area that can be opened in the big winning game may be provided.

Further, in the pachinko game machine PY1 or the like, when a specific jackpot symbol type is determined, the game always progresses in a high-probability state after the jackpot game. That is, the setting of the high probability state is associated with the jackpot symbol type. However, the setting condition of the high probability state may be changed. For example, apart from the big winning device 14D, a second big winning device that can be opened and closed and into which game balls can enter when opened is provided at a position where the game balls can reach in the game area 6, so that a second big winning device can be provided at a position where the game balls can reach. In a predetermined round game, when the game ball that has entered the second big winning device by opening the second big winning device passes through a specific area provided on the downstream side thereof, a high probability state occurs with the end of the big winning game. may be set.

In this case, for example, a specific jackpot pattern (jackpot pattern that makes it easy to set a high probability state) that the second big winning device opens for an easy time (for example, 29.5 seconds), and the second big winning device A non-specific jackpot pattern (a jackpot pattern that makes it difficult to set a high probability state) that opens for a difficult time (for example, 0.5 seconds) can be provided. Further, there are a specific area and a non-specific area as areas through which the winning game balls can pass, and a distribution device for distributing the game balls to the specific area and the non-specific area is provided. Although the opening time of the second big winning device is the same, the combination of the opening mode of the second big winning device and the operation mode of the sorting device makes it easy to set the high probability state and the high probability state. It is also possible to provide a jackpot pattern that is difficult to set.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine PY1 or the like, the game control board 100 performs basic control relating to the progress of the game, and the presentation control board 100 performs basic control relating to the progress of the presentation according to the progress of the game (game control). As shown by 120, the control of the game and the control of the presentation are performed by different substrates, but they may be configured to be performed by one substrate. In this case, the image control board 140 may be included in the one board, or may be provided separately from the one board.

Also, the game machine of the present invention can be applied to other pinball game machines such as an arrange ball machine and a mahjong game machine, and reel-type game machines (so-called "slot machines").

8. Inventions Disclosed in the Aforedescribed Embodiments The following inventions A to J have been disclosed up to the preceding paragraph in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention]. In the descriptions of inventions A to J, the names and expressions of the corresponding configurations in the embodiments of the invention described above and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the elements such as the means constituting each invention are not limited to this appendix. Invention A is a generic term for the following Inventions A1 to A4, Invention B is a generic term for the following Inventions B1 to B2, and Invention C is a generic term for the following Inventions C1 to C2, Invention D is a generic term for Inventions D1 to D3 below, Invention E is a generic term for Inventions E1 to E3 below, Invention F is a generic term for Inventions F1 to F2 below, and Invention G is a generic term for inventions G1 to G3 below, invention H is a generic term for inventions H1 to H4 below, invention I is a generic term for inventions I1 to I4 below, and invention J is a generic term for inventions I1 to I4 below. It is a general term for inventions J1 to J3 below.

8-1-1. Invention A1
A game control means (game control microcomputer 101) for executing a jackpot game accompanied by opening a variable winning opening (big winning opening 14) that can be opened and closed provided in a game area (game area 6) when a predetermined condition is established. In a game machine that
The predetermined condition includes winning a game ball in an openable and closable variable starting port (second starting port 12) provided in the game area,
The game control means is
It is possible to set a specific game state (time saving state) in which the variable start port is easier to open than the normal game state,
The game machine is characterized in that the specific game state may be set without executing the jackpot game.

8-1-2. Invention A2
A gaming machine according to Invention A1,
The game control means is
It is possible to execute variable display of identification information (special pattern),
The predetermined condition includes stopping display of specific identification information (jackpot pattern) in the variable display of the identification information,
After stopping and displaying the specific identification information, executing the jackpot game,
In the variable display of the identification information, when non-specific identification information (losing pattern B, losing pattern C, small winning pattern) different from the specific identification information is stopped and displayed, the specific game state is obtained without executing the jackpot game. A gaming machine characterized in that it has a

8-1-3. Invention A3
A gaming machine according to Invention A2,
The game control means is
Before performing the variable display of the identification information, it is determined whether or not the specific game state can be set (determination of the lost symbol type), and when it is determined that the specific game state can be set in the determination (2) the non-specific identification information can be statically displayed by changing the identification information;

8-1-4. Invention A4
A gaming machine according to Invention A3,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the game control means may cause the specific game state after executing the jackpot game.

8-2-1. Invention B1
It is possible to perform variable display of identification information (special symbols), and when specific identification information (jackpot symbols) is displayed in a stationary manner in the variable display, an openable and closable variable winning opening ( In a gaming machine equipped with game control means (game control microcomputer 101) for executing a jackpot game with the opening of the big winning opening 14),
The game control means is
It is possible to make a specific game state (time saving state) in which the openable and closable variable starter (second starter 12) provided in the game area is easier to open than in the normal game state,
In the variable display of the identification information, when non-specific identification information (losing pattern B, losing pattern C, small winning pattern) different from the specific identification information is stopped and displayed, the specific game state is obtained without executing the jackpot game. may be
In the case of the normal game state and the case of the specific game state, the variation time (special figure variation time) related to the variation display of the identification information is determined based on different conditions (variation pattern determination table). game machine.

8-2-2. Invention B2
A gaming machine according to invention B1,
The non-specific identification information includes at least first non-specific identification information (losing pattern B) and second non-specific identification information (losing pattern C),
The game control means differs between the specific game state after stop-displaying the first non-specific identification information and the specific game state after stop-displaying the second non-specific identification information. A gaming machine characterized by determining the variation time based on conditions (special figure variation pattern determination table).

8-3-1. Invention C1
It is possible to perform variable display of identification information (special symbols), and when specific identification information (jackpot symbols) is displayed in a stationary manner in the variable display, an openable and closable variable winning opening ( In a gaming machine equipped with game control means (game control microcomputer 101) for executing a jackpot game with the opening of the big winning opening 14),
The game control means is
It is possible to make a specific game state (time saving state) in which the openable and closable variable starter (second starter 12) provided in the game area is easier to open than in the normal game state,
In the variable display of the identification information, when non-specific identification information (losing pattern B, losing pattern C, small winning pattern) different from the specific identification information is stopped and displayed, the specific game state is obtained without executing the jackpot game. may be
The non-specific identification information includes at least first non-specific identification information (losing pattern B) and second non-specific identification information (losing pattern C),
The specific game state (second time saving state) after the first non-specific identification information is stopped and displayed, and the specific game state (third time saving state) after the second non-specific identification information is stopped and displayed, is different.

8-3-2. Invention C2
A gaming machine according to invention C1,
The game control means differs between the specific game state after stop-displaying the first non-specific identification information and the specific game state after stop-displaying the second non-specific identification information. A gaming machine characterized by determining a variable time for variable display of the identification information based on a condition (a special figure variation pattern determination table).

8-4-1. Invention D1
It is possible to perform variable display of identification information (special symbols), and when specific identification information (jackpot symbols) is displayed in a stationary manner in the variable display, an openable and closable variable winning opening ( In a gaming machine equipped with game control means for executing a jackpot game (game control microcomputer 101) with the opening of the big winning opening 14),
The game control means is
It is possible to make a specific game state (time saving state) in which the openable and closable variable starter (second starter 12) provided in the game area is easier to open than in the normal game state,
When the specific game state is set after the jackpot game is executed, and non-specific identification information (losing pattern B, losing pattern C, small winning pattern) different from the specific identification information is displayed in the variable display of the identification information. After stopping display, there is a case where the specific game state is set without executing the jackpot game,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific game state when the jackpot game is executed is different from the specific game state when the jackpot game is not executed.

8-4-2. Invention D2
A gaming machine according to invention D1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that ease of opening the variable starting port is different between the specific game state when the jackpot game is executed and the specific game state when the jackpot game is not executed. .

8-4-3. Invention D3
A gaming machine according to invention D1 or invention D2,
The game control means, the specific game state when the jackpot game is executed, and the specific game state when the jackpot game is not executed, based on different conditions (special figure variation pattern determination table) , a gaming machine characterized in that it determines a variable time for variable display of the identification information.

8-5-1. Invention E1
It is possible to perform variable display of identification information (special symbols), and when specific identification information (jackpot symbols) is displayed in a stationary manner in the variable display, an openable and closable variable winning opening ( In a gaming machine equipped with game control means (game control microcomputer 101) for executing a jackpot game with the opening of the big winning opening 14),
The game control means is
It is possible to make a specific game state (time saving state) in which the openable and closable variable starter (second starter 12) provided in the game area is easier to open than in the normal game state,
When the specific game state is set according to the end of the jackpot game, and non-specific identification information (losing pattern B, losing pattern C, small winning pattern) different from the specific identification information is displayed in the variable display of the identification information There are cases where the specific game state is set according to the stop display,
When the specific game state is set in response to the end of the jackpot game, and when the specific game state is set in response to the stop display of the non-specific identification information, different conditions (special figure variation pattern determination table) A gaming machine, wherein a variable time period for variable display of the identification information is determined based on the above.

8-5-2. Invention E2
A gaming machine according to invention E1,
The non-specific identification information includes at least first non-specific identification information and second non-specific identification information,
The game control means, when the specific game state is set in response to the stop display of the first non-specific identification information, and when the specific game state is set in response to the stop display of the second non-specific identification information , a gaming machine characterized in that the variable time is determined based on the same conditions (variation pattern determination table).

8-5-3. Invention E3
A gaming machine according to invention E1 or invention E2,
End condition of the specific game state when it becomes the specific game state in response to the stop display of the first non-specific identification information, and the specific game state in response to the stop display of the second non-specific identification information A gaming machine characterized in that the conditions for ending the specific game state (prescribed number of times of shortening of working hours) are different from each other.

8-6-1. Invention F1
It is possible to perform a variable display of identification information (special symbol) on the condition that the ball enters the start port (first start port 11, second start port 12) provided in the game area (game area 6), and the variation When specific identification information (jackpot pattern) is stopped and displayed on the display, a game control means (for game control In a game machine equipped with a microcomputer 101),
The starting port includes a variable starting port (second starting port 12) that can be opened and closed,
The game control means is
As a game state related to the ease of opening the variable starting port, it is possible to set it to a non-specific state (non-time saving state) or a specific state (time saving state) in which the ease of opening the variable starting port is higher than the non-specific state is possible and
As a game state related to the probability that the specific identification information is stop-displayed in the variable display, a normal probability state or a high probability that the specific identification information is stop-displayed in the variable display is higher than the normal probability state. It is possible to put it into a stochastic state,
When non-specific identification information (losing pattern B, losing pattern C) different from the specific identification information is stopped in the variable display when the normal probability state and the non-specific state are displayed, the non- changing the specific state to the specific state;
A game characterized by not changing the non-specified state to the specified state when the non-specified identification information is stop-displayed in the variable display in the high-probability state and the non-specified state. machine.

8-6-2. Invention F2
A gaming machine according to invention F1,
When the specific identification information is stop-displayed in the variable display in the high-probability state and the non-specific state, the game control means controls the jackpot based on the stop-display of the specific identification information. A gaming machine characterized in that the non-specified state may be changed to the specified state in accordance with the end of a game.

8-7-1. Invention G1
It is possible to perform a variable display of identification information (special symbol) on the condition that the ball enters the start port (first start port 11, second start port 12) provided in the game area (game area 6), and the variation When specific identification information (jackpot pattern) is stopped and displayed on the display, a game control means (for game control In a game machine equipped with a microcomputer 101),
The starting port includes a variable starting port (second starting port 12) that can be opened and closed,
The game control means is
As a game state related to the ease of opening the variable starting port, it is possible to set it to a non-specific state (non-specific state) or a specific state (time-saving state) in which the ease of opening the variable starting port is higher than the non-specific state. is possible and
As a game state related to the probability that the specific identification information is stop-displayed in the variable display, a normal probability state or a high probability that the specific identification information is stop-displayed in the variable display is higher than the normal probability state. It is possible to put it into a stochastic state,
When non-specific identification information (losing pattern B, losing pattern C) different from the specific identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display when the normal probability state and the non-specific state, the non- changing the specific state to the specific state;
A game characterized by changing the non-specific state to the specific state when the non-specific identification information is stop-displayed in the variable display in the high-probability state and the non-specific state. machine.

8-7-2. Invention G2
A gaming machine according to invention G2,
a condition for terminating the specified state when the non-specified identification information is stop-displayed in the normal-probability state and the non-specified state; and the high-probability state and the non-specified state. A gaming machine characterized in that a condition for terminating the specific state when the non-specific identification information is stopped and displayed is different.

8-7-3. Invention G3
A gaming machine according to invention G1 or invention G2,
The game control means changes the high probability state to the normal probability state when the specific identification information is stop-displayed in the variable display in the high probability state and the non-specific state. A gaming machine characterized in that

8-8-1. Invention H1
Variable display of identification information (special symbols) can be executed on the condition that a game ball enters a start port (first start port 11, second start port 12) provided in the game area (game area 6). When specific identification information (jackpot pattern) is stopped and displayed in the variable display, a game control to execute a jackpot game accompanied by opening of an openable and closable variable winning port (big winning port 14) provided in the game area In a gaming machine comprising means (game control microcomputer 101),
The starting port includes a first starting port that does not open and close and a second starting port that can be opened and closed,
The game control means is
It is possible to set the second start port to a specific state (time saving state) that is easier to open than the normal state (non-time saving state),
In the normal state, when non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information (losing pattern B, losing pattern C, losing pattern E, and losing pattern F) is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the identification information, the specific state west,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the specific state, even if the non-specific identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the identification information, the specific state is continued.

8-8-2. Invention H2
A gaming machine according to invention H1,
The game control means is
In the normal state, when the non-specific identification information (losing pattern E, losing pattern F) is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the identification information based on the ball entering the second starting port, the specific state is set,
In the specific state, the specific state is continued even if the non-specific identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the identification information based on the ball entering the second starting port. .

8-8-3. Invention H3
A gaming machine according to invention H1,
The game control means is
In the normal state, when the non-specific identification information (losing pattern B, losing pattern C) is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the identification information based on the ball entering the first starting port, the specific state is set,
In the specific state, the specific state is continued even if the non-specific identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the identification information based on the ball entering the first starting port. .

8-8-4. Invention H4
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions H1 to H3,
When the specific state is set in response to the stop display of the non-specific identification information, the specific state can be continued until a predetermined end condition (time saving prescribed number of times "150 times", "50 times") is satisfied. can be,
In the specific state that can be continued until the predetermined termination condition is satisfied, even if the non-specific identification information is stopped and displayed, the specific state is continued without changing the predetermined termination condition. game machine.

8-9-1. Invention I1
It is possible to perform variable display of identification information (special symbols), and when specific identification information (jackpot symbols) is displayed in a stationary manner in the variable display, an openable and closable variable winning opening ( In a gaming machine equipped with game control means (game control microcomputer 101) for executing a jackpot game with the opening of the big winning opening 14),
The game control means is
The openable and closable variable starting port (second starting port 12) provided in the game area can be set to a specific state (time saving state) that is easier to open than the normal state (non-time saving state),
In the normal state, when the non-specific identification information (loss pattern E) different from the specific identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the identification information, a predetermined duration (time saving prescribed number of times "80 times"), the It is possible to put it in a specific state,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the specific state, when the non-specific identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the identification information, the duration is extended.

8-9-2. Invention I2
A gaming machine according to invention I1,
The first duration related to the specific state based on the stop display of the non-specific identification information in the normal state (time saving prescribed number of times "80 times"), and the non-specific identification information is stopped in the specific state A game machine characterized in that it is different from the period of minutes extended based on the display (time saving prescribed number of times "40 times").

8-9-3. Invention I3
A gaming machine according to invention I2,
The duration period is provided with an upper limit value (time saving limiter number of times "200 times"),
The gaming machine, wherein the game control means changes the specified state to the non-specified state when the duration reaches the upper limit value.

8-9-4. Invention I4
A gaming machine according to any one of Invention I3,
When the specific identification information is stop-displayed in the normal game state, the game control means controls the specific state for a predetermined period of time in response to the execution of the jackpot game based on the stop-display of the specific identification information. and
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined period is shorter than the duration of the period when the upper limit is reached.

8-10-1. Invention J1
It is possible to perform variable display of identification information (special symbols), and when specific identification information (jackpot symbols) is displayed in a stationary manner in the variable display, an openable and closable variable winning opening ( In a gaming machine equipped with game control means (game control microcomputer 101) for executing a jackpot game with the opening of the big winning opening 14),
The game control means is
In response to the end of the jackpot game, the probability that the specific identification information is stopped and displayed may be in a high probability state higher than the normal normal probability state,
In the variable display of the identification information, when the non-specific identification information (small winning pattern) different from the specific identification information is stopped and displayed, a small winning game is executed with the opening of the variable winning opening, and the small winning game is executed. Depending on the end, the openable and closable variable starting port (second starting port 12) provided in the game area is a specific state (time saving state) that is easier to open than the normal non-specific state (non working time saving state) A gaming machine characterized in that it has a

8-10-2. Invention J2
A gaming machine according to invention J1,
The non-specific identification information includes first non-specific identification information (small winning pattern B) and second non-specific identification information (small winning pattern A),
The game control means is
When the first non-specific identification information is stopped and displayed, the specific state is set after executing the small winning game,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the second non-specific identification information is stop-displayed, the specific state is set before executing the small winning game.

8-10-3. Invention J3
A gaming machine according to invention J1 or invention J2,
The game control means is
When predetermined identification information different from the specific identification information and the non-specific identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the identification information in the non-specific state, the small winning game is executed and the small winning game ends. It is characterized in that the non-specific state is not changed to the specific state according to the operation.

PY1... Pachinko machine 1... Game board 11... First starting hole 11a... First starting hole sensor 12... Second starting hole 12a... Second starting hole sensor 14... Big winning hole 14a... Big winning hole sensor 40... First Effect button device 40k First effect button 40a First effect button sensor 41 Second effect button device 41k Second effect button 41a Second effect button sensor 50 Image display device 50a Display unit 52 Speaker 53 Frame lamp 55... Board movable device 55k... Board movable body 100... Game control board 101... Game control microcomputer 120... Production control board 121... Production control microcomputer 140... Image control board

Claims (1)

A game control means capable of executing a variable display of identification information, and executing a jackpot game accompanied by opening a variable winning port provided in a game area when specific identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display. In a game machine that
The game control means is
In response to the end of the jackpot game, the probability that the specific identification information is stopped and displayed may be in a high probability state higher than the normal normal probability state,
In the variable display of the identification information, when non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information is stopped and displayed, a small winning game is executed with the opening of the variable winning opening, and the opening and closing provided in the game area is executed. A variable starting port may be in a specific state that is easier to open than a normal non-specific state
The non-specific identification information includes first non-specific identification information and second non-specific identification information,
When the first non-specific identification information is stopped and displayed, the specific state is entered after the small winning game is executed,
A gaming machine characterized in that , when the second non-specific identification information is stop-displayed, the specific state is entered before the small winning game is executed .

Images